FMC Accuload 4 Operation Manual

Manual
Electronic Preset Delivery System

Smith Meter®
AccuLoad® IV
Operator Reference Manual
Bulletin MN06200 Issue/Rev 0.2 (9/21)
Important
All information and technical specifications in this documentation have been carefully checked and compiled by
the author. However, we cannot completely exclude the possibility of errors. TechnipFMC is always grateful to be
informed of any errors. Contact us on the website.
Smith Meter is a registered trademark of TechnipFMC.
Caution
The default or operating values used in this manual and in the program of the AccuLoad IV are for factory testing
only and should not be construed as default or operating values for your metering system. Each metering system
is unique and each program parameter must be reviewed and programmed for that specific metering system
application.
Disclaimer
TechnipFMC hereby disclaims any and all responsibility for damages, including but not limited to consequential
damages, arising out of or related to the inputting of incorrect or improper program or default values entered in
connection with the AccuLoad IV.
Technical Support
Field Service Response Center
24/7 Technical Support/Schedule a Technician: 1-844-798-3819
System installation supervision, start-up, and commissioning services available
Customer Support
Customer Service
TechnipFMC
Measurement and Production Solutions
1602 Wagner Avenue
Erie, Pennsylvania 16510 USA
+1 814 898-5000
MS.ResponseCenter@TechnipFMC.com
TechnipFMC.com
Literature Library:
http://info.smithmeter.com/literature/online_index.html
Page 2 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Introduction..............................................................................7 2.2.5.2 Security Level Activation.............................................................40
1.1 Product Description................................................................7 2.2.5.3 Parameter Security Level Assignment.......................................40
1.2 AccuLoad IV Models and Module.........................................7 2.2.5.4 Security Switches........................................................................40
1.2.1 AccuLoad IV ST Models..................................................................7 2.2.5.5 Communications Security...........................................................41
1.2.2 AccuLoad IV QT Model....................................................................8 2.2.5.6 Diagnostics Security...................................................................41
1.2.3 AccuLoad IV N4 Model....................................................................8 2.2.5.7 Security Configuration Example.................................................41
1.2.4 AccuLoad IV SA Model....................................................................9
3 Dynamic Displays.................................................................43
1.3 Common Features of All Models.........................................10
1.4 Configuring for Operation....................................................11 3.1 Dynamic Displays................................................................44
1.4.1 Load Arms Types........................................................................... 11 3.1.1 System Dynamic Displays.............................................................45
1.4.1.1 Straight........................................................................................12 3.1.2 Load Arms Dynamic Displays.......................................................45
1.4.1.2 Sequential Blending....................................................................12 3.1.2.1 Product Dynamic Displays.........................................................46
1.4.1.3 Ratio Blending.............................................................................13 3.1.2.2 Batch Dynamic Displays.............................................................47
1.4.1.4 Hybrid Blending...........................................................................14 3.1.2.3 Transaction Dynamic Displays...................................................48
1.4.1.5 Side-Stream Blending.................................................................15 3.1.2.4 Blend Dynamic Displays.............................................................49
1.4.1.6 Unloading....................................................................................16 3.1.2.5 Ratio Blend Data Dynamic Displays..........................................49
1.4.1.7 Straight Arm With Vapor Recovery System (Straight with 3.1.2.6 Density Sampling Dynamic Displays.........................................50
“VRS”).......................................................................................................16 3.1.2.7 Recipe Dynamic Displays...........................................................50
1.5 I/O Assignments...................................................................17 3.1.2.8 Injector Rates Dynamic Displays...............................................50
1.6 Units of Measure..................................................................17 3.1.2.9 Flow Controlled Additives Dynamic Displays............................51
1.7 Flow Control.........................................................................17 3.1.3 Diagnostics Dynamic Displays Menu...........................................52
1.8 Product Definition.................................................................18 3.1.3.1 Active Alarms Diagnostics..........................................................53
1.9 Additive Injection..................................................................18 3.1.3.2 Alarm History Diagnostics...........................................................53
3.1.3.3 Non-Resettable Volume Diagnostics.........................................53
3.1.3.4 Event Log Diagnostics................................................................54
2 Operations..............................................................................19 3.1.3.5 Transaction Log Diagnostics......................................................55
2.1 Run Mode Overview............................................................19 3.1.3.6 Audit Trail Diagnostics................................................................56
2.1.1 Run Mode Options.........................................................................20 3.1.3.7 Digital Inputs Diagnostics...........................................................56
2.1.2 Typical Loading Sequence............................................................20 3.1.3.8 Digital Outputs Diagnostics........................................................57
2.1.3 System Status Display...................................................................25 3.1.3.9 Analog Input/Output (I/O) Diagnostics.......................................57
2.1.4 Idle Arms.........................................................................................28 3.1.3.10 Pulse Inputs Diagnostics..........................................................57
2.1.5 Arm Focus......................................................................................28 3.1.3.11 Pulse Outputs Diagnostics.......................................................58
2.1.6 Arm Display Precedence...............................................................29 3.1.3.12 Reset Dual Pulse Errors Diagnostics......................................58
2.1.7 Alarm Reporting.............................................................................29 3.1.3.13 Solenoid Actuation Count Diagnostics.....................................58
2.1.8 Allow Run/Ready Mode Clearing..................................................29 3.1.3.14 Valve Closure Database Diagnostics......................................59
2.1.9 Energize Alarm Relay Output One/Two........................................29 3.1.3.15 Meter Pulse Inputs Diagnostics...............................................59
2.1.10 Notify Via E-mail...........................................................................30 3.1.3.16 Boolean/Algebraic Diagnostics................................................59
2.1.11 Allow Flow to Continue.................................................................30 3.1.3.17 Engineering Diagnostics...........................................................60
2.1.12 Permissive Inputs.........................................................................30 3.1.3.18 Network Diagnostics.................................................................60
2.1.13 Main Menu Operation..................................................................31 3.1.3.19 Update Driver Database Diagnostics......................................61
2.2 Program Mode Overview.....................................................31 3.1.3.20 Update Firmware Diagnostics..................................................61
2.2.1 Program Mode Menu.....................................................................32 3.1.3.21 Update License Diagnostics.....................................................61
2.2.1.1 Configuration Directory Overview..............................................32 3.1.3.22 Force Update Diagnostics........................................................62
2.2.1.2 System Directory Overview........................................................33 3.1.3.23 Serial Communications Monitor Diagnostics...........................62
2.2.1.3 Bays Directory Overview............................................................33 3.1.3.24 Connected Devices..................................................................62
2.2.1.4 Arms Directory Overview............................................................33 3.1.3.25 Connected Devices Diagnostics..............................................63
2.2.1.5 Recipes Directory Overview.......................................................34 3.1.3.25.1 Adding (Pairing) I/O Boards.................................................63
2.2.1.6 Split Architecture Directory Overview.........................................34 3.1.3.25.2 Replacing I/O Boards............................................................64
2.2.2 Database Modification Using Front Panel or Browswer..............35 3.1.3.25.3 Deleting I/O Boards...............................................................65
2.2.3 Program Mode Directory Map.......................................................39 3.1.3.25.4 Resetting the System (Soft Restart).....................................65
2.2.4 Viewing the Help Messages..........................................................40 3.1.3..25.5 Resetting Individual I/O Boards (Soft Restart)....................66
2.2.5 Security...........................................................................................40
2.2.5.1 Security Levels............................................................................40
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 3
AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Table of Contents
4 Reports/Logs......................................................................... 67 8.2.7.1 Arm 1 - 6 Addresses................................................................ 132

4.1 Summary Reports ............................................................... 67 8.2.7.2 Printer Control.......................................................................... 133
4.2 Audit Trail.............................................................................. 68 8.2.7.3 Host Interface........................................................................... 134
4.3 Alarm History........................................................................ 68 8.2.7.4 Card/Nedap Reader................................................................ 138
4.4 Transaction Log.................................................................... 68 8.2.7.5 Serial Port Configuration 1 - 4................................................. 141
4.4.1 Total Number of Stored Batches...................................... 69 8.2.7.6 Prompts.................................................................................... 143
4.5 Event Log............................................................................. 69 8.2.8 800–Additive Directory................................................................ 145
4.6 Prove Log............................................................................. 70 8.2.8.1 Additives (Common)................................................................ 145
8.2.8.2 Additives Configuration Menu - Injector 1 - 24....................... 150
8.2.8.3 Flow Controlled Injector 1 - 4................................................... 153
5 Weights and Measures/Calibration Menu......................... 71 8.2.9 900–Security Directory............................................................... 158
5.1 DB Settings (Database Settings)........................................ 71 8.3 Bay Directories.................................................................. 159
5.2 Set Trans # (Set Transaction Number)............................... 72 8.3.1 100–General Purpose Bay Directories...................................... 159
5.3 Erase Event Log................................................................... 72 8.3.2 700–Communications Bay Directories...................................... 160
5.4 Erase Transaction Log......................................................... 73 8.4 Arms Directories................................................................ 162
5.5 Meter Proving....................................................................... 73 8.4.1 100–General Purpose Directory................................................ 162
5.6 Metered Injector Proving...................................................... 76 8.4.2 200–Flow Control Directory........................................................ 164
5.7 Reset Totals.......................................................................... 78 8.4.3 300–Volume Accuracy Directory................................................ 169
5.8 Firmware Lock...................................................................... 78 8.4.4 700–Communications Directory................................................. 171
8.5 Meter Directories............................................................... 173
8.5.1 200–Flow Control Directory........................................... 173
6 Device Settings..................................................................... 79
8.5.2 300–Volume Accuracy Directory................................... 175
6.1 Screen Style......................................................................... 79
8.5.3 400–Temperature/Density Directory............................. 177
6.2 Man-Machine Interface (MMI) Settings)............................. 79
8.5.3.1 400–Solatron Densitometer....................................... 178
6.3 Screen Test........................................................................... 79
8.5.3.2 400–Sarasota Densitometer...................................... 179
6.4 Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
8.5.3.3 400–UGC Densitometer............................................. 181
Models)........................................................................................ 80
8.5.3.4 400–Other Densitometer............................................ 182
6.5 Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model).................... 84
8.5.4 500–Pressure Directory................................................. 183
6.6 Touchscreen Recalibration Procedures.............................. 89
8.6 Product Directories............................................................ 183
6.6.1 Equipment and Other Requirements.............................................89
8.6.1 100–Arm>Products>General Purpose Directory......... 183
6.6.2 Accessing the Display Module Menu Through the AccuLoad IV
8.6.2 200–Arm:Products:Flow Control Directory................... 183
Menu..........................................................................................................89
8.6.3 300–Accuracy Directory................................................ 186
6.6.3 Display Module Touchscreen Recalibration Procedure................91
8.6.4 400–Temperature/Density Directory............................. 189
6.6.4 Alternate Methods to Initiate a Calibration (If Touchscreen is
8.6.5 500–Pressure Directory................................................. 195
Unresponsive)...........................................................................................92
8.7 Recipe Directories............................................................. 198
8.7.1 Product Blend................................................................. 198
7 Device Information ............................................................... 93 8.7.2 Recipe Additives............................................................. 200
8.8 Split Architecture Directories............................................. 201
8 Program Mode Reference.................................................... 95 8.8.1 Split Architecture Board Sets......................................... 203
8.1 Configuration Directories..................................................... 96
8.1.1 System Layout Directory................................................................96 9 Appendix I–Alarms............................................................ 205
8.1.2 Pulse Input Directory.......................................................................98
10 Appendix II–Metered Injector Map on the AccuLoad
8.1.3 200–Pulse Outputs Directory...................................................... 100
IV............................................................................................... 207
8.1.4 300–DC & AC Digital Input Function Directories........................ 102
8.1.5 500–DC & AC Digital Output Function Directories..................... 105 11 Appendix III–Default Blending Arm Batch Page
8.1.6 900–Analog I/O Directories......................................................... 109 Report...................................................................................... 208
8.2 System Directories..............................................................112
8.2.1 100–General Purpose Directory..................................................112 12 Appendix IV–Default Straight Product Arm Report.... 209
8.2.2 200–Flow Control Directory..........................................................118
13 Related Publications....................................................... 210
8.2.3 300–Volume Accuracy Directory................................................. 120
8.2.4 400–Temperature/Density Directory........................................... 127 Index......................................................................................... 211
8.2.5 500–Pressure Directory............................................................... 128
8.2.6 600–Alarm Configuration Directory............................................. 129
8.2.7 700–Communications Directory.................................................. 132
Page 4 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Figures
Figures Figure 48: System—General Purpose...................................... 36

Figure 49: System—Unit ID....................................................... 37
Figure 50: System—Change Unit ID, 1.................................... 37
Figure 1: AccuLoad IV ST..............................................................7 Figure 51: System—Change Unit ID, 2.................................... 37
Figure 2: AccuLoad IV QT Model..................................................8 Figure 52: System—Change Unit ID, 3.................................... 37
Figure 3: AccuLoad IV N4 Model and MMI Module.....................9 Figure 53: System—Change Unit ID, 4.................................... 38
Figure 4: AccuLoad IV SA Model.................................................10 Figure 54: System—Change Unit ID, 5.................................... 38
Figure 5: Typical Straight Arm......................................................12 Figure 55: System—Change Unit ID, 5.................................... 38
Figure 6: Sequential Blending Arm..............................................13 Figure 56: Dynamic Displays Menu.......................................... 43
Figure 7: Ratio Blending Arm.......................................................14 Figure 57: Dynamic Displays Menu—Load Arms.................... 43
Figure 8: Hybrid Blending Arm.....................................................15 Figure 58: Dynamic Displays—Load Arm 1.............................. 43
Figure 9: Side-Stream Blending Arm...........................................15 Figure 59: Dynamic Displays—Product 1, 1............................. 44
Figure 10: Unloading Arm............................................................16 Figure 60: Dynamic Displays—Product 1, 2............................. 44
Figure 11: Straight Arm With Vapor Recovery System (VRS)...16 Figure 61: Dynamic Displays—Product 1, 3............................. 44
Figure 12: Flow Rate Profile........................................................17 Figure 62: System Dynamic Displays....................................... 45
Figure 13: Main Menu Screen.....................................................19 Figure 63: Product Dynamic Displays....................................... 46
Figure 14: Run Mode Ready Screen..........................................19 Figure 64: Blend Dynamic Displays.......................................... 49
Figure 15: Run Screen with Transactions in Progress (Two-Arm Figure 65: Ratio Blend Data Dynamic Displays........................ 49
Configuration)...............................................................................20 Figure 66: Density Sampling Dynamic Displays....................... 50
Figure 16: Typical Loading Sequence—Select Arm...................20 Figure 67: Recipe Dynamic Displays........................................ 50
Figure 17: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Driver ID, 1........21 Figure 68: Flow Controlled Additives Dynamic Displays.......... 51
Figure 18: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Driver ID, 2........21 Figure 69: Diagnostic Dynamic Displays Options.................... 52
Figure 19: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Driver ID 3.........21 Figure 70: Active Alarms............................................................ 53
Figure 20: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Pin Number, 1...22 Figure 71: Alarm History............................................................ 53
Figure 21: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Pin Number, 2...22 Figure 72: Non-Resettable Volumes......................................... 54
Figure 22: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Pin Number, 3...22 Figure 73: Product Volumes...................................................... 54
Figure 23: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Pin Number, 4...22 Figure 74: Additive Injector Values............................................ 54
Figure 24: Typical Loading Sequence—Recipe Selection, 1.....23 Figure 75: Recipes Selection..................................................... 54
Figure 25: Typical Loading Sequence—Recipe Selection, 2.....23 Figure 76: Event Log.................................................................. 55
Figure 26: Typical Loading Sequence—Recipe Selection, 3.....23 Figure 77: Transaction Log........................................................ 55
Figure 27: Typical Loading Sequence—Recipe Selection, 4.....24 Figure 78: Audit Trail Diagnostics.............................................. 56
Figure 28: Typical Loading Sequence—Recipe Selection, 5.....24 Figure 79: Digital Inputs............................................................. 56
Figure 29: Typical Loading Sequence—Status of Transaction Figure 80: Digital Outputs.......................................................... 57
Diagram........................................................................................24 Figure 81: Analog I/O................................................................. 57
Figure 30: Typical Loading Sequence—Stop Flow on All Figure 82: Pulse Inputs.............................................................. 57
Arms..............................................................................................25 Figure 83: Pulse Outputs........................................................... 58
Figure 31: Typical Loading Sequence—Return to Ready Figure 84: Reset Dual Pulse Errors........................................... 58
Screen...........................................................................................25 Figure 85: Solenoid Actuation Count Diagnostics.................... 58
Figure 32: System Status Display...............................................25 Figure 86: Valve Closure Database Diagnostics...................... 59
Figure 33: System Status Display...............................................26 Figure 87: Meter Pulse Inputs................................................... 59
Figure 34: Typical Ready Screen Alarm Message.....................29 Figure 88: Boolean/Algebraic Diagnostics................................ 60
Figure 35: Return to Main Menu..................................................31 Figure 89: General Purpose Timers Diagnostics...................... 60
Figure 36: Program Mode............................................................31 Figure 90: Engineering Diagnostics.......................................... 60
Figure 37: Program Mode Directories.........................................32 Figure 91: Network Diagnostics................................................. 60
Figure 38: Configuration Subdirectories......................................32 Figure 92: Update Driver Database Diagnostics...................... 61
Figure 39: System Directory Subdirectories...............................33 Figure 93: Update License Diagnostics.................................... 61
Figure 40: Bays Directory Subdirectories...................................33 Figure 94: Serial Monitor............................................................ 62
Figure 41: Arms Directory Subdirectories...................................34 Figure 95: Selecting a Serial Port.............................................. 62
Figure 42: Recipes Directory Subdirectories..............................34 Figure 96: Adding (Pairing) I/O Boards, Step 2........................ 63
Figure 43: Split Architecture Directory Subdirectories................34 Figure 97: Adding (Pairing) I/O Boards, Step 3........................ 63
Figure 44: Program Mode............................................................35 Figure 98: Adding (Pairing) I/O Boards, Step 4........................ 63
Figure 45: Security Passcode Entry............................................35 Figure 99: Adding (Pairing) I/O Boards, Step 5........................ 64
Figure 46: System Menu..............................................................36 Figure 100: Replacing I/O Boards, Step 2................................ 64
Figure 47: System—General Purpose........................................36
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 5

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Figures
Figure 101: Replacing I/O Boards, Step 3..................................65 Figure 146: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Figure 102: Deleting I/O Boards, Step 3.....................................65 Models), Step 8.......................................................................... 82
Figure 103: Deleting I/O Boards, Step 4.....................................65 Figure 147: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Figure 104: Resetting the System (Soft Restart), Step 2...........65 Models), Step 9.......................................................................... 82
Figure 105: Resetting the System (Soft Restart), Step 3...........66 Figure 148: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Figure 106: Resetting Individual I/O Boards (Soft Restart), Models), Step 9.......................................................................... 83
Step 3............................................................................................66 Figure 149: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Figure 107: Resetting Individual I/O Boards (Soft Restart), Models), Step 10........................................................................ 83
Step 4............................................................................................66 Figure 150: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Figure 108: Report/Logs Main Menu..........................................67 Models), Step 11........................................................................ 83
Figure 109: Summary Reports....................................................67 Figure 151: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Figure 110: Audit Trail...................................................................68 Models), Step 12........................................................................ 84
Figure 111: Alarm History.............................................................68 Figure 152: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board
Figure 112: Transaction Log, Screen 1.......................................68 Set SAA...................................................................................... 85
Figure 113: Transaction Log, Screen 2.......................................69 Figure 153: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board
Figure 114: Event Log..................................................................69 Set SAB...................................................................................... 85
Figure 115: Prove Log, Screen 1.................................................70 Figure 154: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board
Figure 116: Prove Log, Screen 2.................................................70 Set SAC...................................................................................... 86
Figure 117: Prove Log, Screen 3.................................................70 Figure 155: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board
Figure 118: Prove Data................................................................70 Set SAA...................................................................................... 86
Figure 119: Weights and Measures/Calibration Main Menu......71 Figure 156: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board
Figure 120: Database Initialization..............................................72 Set SAB...................................................................................... 86
Figure 121: Set Transaction Number..........................................72 Figure 157: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board
Figure 122: Erase Event Log, Screen 1......................................72 Set SAC...................................................................................... 87
Figure 123: Erase Event Log, Screen 2......................................73 Figure 158: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Net-
Figure 124: Erase Transaction Log, Screen 1............................73 work Settings.............................................................................. 87
Figure 125: Erase Transaction Log, Screen 2............................73 Figure 159: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Net-
Figure 126: Meter Proving, Step 1..............................................73 work Settings 2........................................................................... 88
Figure 127: Meter Proving, Step 2..............................................74 Figure 160: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Pri-
Figure 128: Meter Proving, Step 3..............................................74 mary URL.................................................................................... 88
Figure 129: Meter Proving, Step 4..............................................74 Figure 161: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Pri-
Figure 130: Meter Proving, Step 5..............................................75 mary URL.................................................................................... 89
Figure 131: Meter Proving, Step 6..............................................75 Figure 162: Display Module Menu............................................ 89
Figure 132: Meter Proving, Step 7..............................................75 Figure 163: Main Menu, Device Settings.................................. 90
Figure 133: Meter Proving, Weights and Measures Menu........76 Figure 164: Main Menu, Device Settings, Touchscreen Calibra-
Figure 134: Metered Injector Proving, Description 1..................76 tion............................................................................................... 90
Figure 135: Metered Injector Proving, Description 2..................77 Figure 165: Maintenance Menu................................................. 91
Figure 136: Metered Injector Proving, Description 3..................77 Figure 166: Touchscreen Calibration from Maintenance
Figure 137: Reset Totals..............................................................78 Menu........................................................................................... 91
Figure 138: Firmware Lock..........................................................78 Figure 167: Log in at Security Level 4....................................... 91
Figure 139: Device Settings.........................................................79 Figure 168: TSLIB Test Program............................................... 91
Figure 140: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4 Figure 169: Action Timed Out.................................................... 92
Models), Step 2............................................................................80 Figure 170: Red Bar on LCD..................................................... 92
Figure 141: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4 Figure 171: Device Information................................................. 93
Models), Step 3............................................................................80 Figure 172: Edit Program Code Data........................................ 93
Figure 142: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4 Figure 173: Board Set 1........................................................... 203
Models), Step 4............................................................................81 Figure 174: Board Set 2........................................................... 203
Figure 143: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4 Figure 175: Board Set 3........................................................... 204
Models), Step 5............................................................................81
Figure 144: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Models), Step 6............................................................................81
Figure 145: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4
Models), Step 7............................................................................82
Page 6 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 Product Description

The Smith Meter® AccuLoad® provides reliable and accurate control and measure-
ment of liquid petroleum blending and transfer operations. While primarily intended
for use in refined petroleum distribution terminals, it can be easily configured for a
wide variety of liquid transfer applications.
Operators can select an amount of product to transfer and the AccuLoad monitors
and controls the configured pumps, valves, and additive injectors to safely and ef-
ficiently transfer the precise recipe and amount. During the transfer, all processing
parameters are monitored to provide operators with an accurate amount of each
component of the recipe delivered.
In addition to real-time control of the loading process, the AccuLoad also calculates
averages and live quantities of all products and additives delivered. This information
is stored in a runtime database that can be monitored by a supervisory host system.
Whenever a transaction is completed, the AccuLoad stores a detailed record in an
internal transaction log for subsequent retrieval or printing.
1.2 AccuLoad IV Models and Module

The AccuLoad IV is available in several hardware configurations and with multiple
standard and optional modules.
1.2.1 AccuLoad IV ST Models

The Single Touch Screen (ST) model has the following specifications:
• Explosion-proof, Class I, Division 1, Zone 1 rated enclosure
• Up to two-arm operation
• Up to four single- or dual product meter inputs
• Up to four additive meter inputs or, with the optional A4I module, up to 24 additive
meter inputs
• AccuLoad III to IV upgrade kit (UG3)
Figure 1: AccuLoad IV ST
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 7

1.2.2 AccuLoad IV QT Model

The Single Touch Screen (ST) model has the following specifications:
• Explosion-proof enclosure Class I, Division 1, Zone 1 rated
• Up to six-arm operation
• Up to six single- or dual-pulse product meter inputs
• Up to four additive meter inputs or, with the optional A4I module, up to 24 additive
meter inputs
• AccuLoad III to IV upgrade kit (UG3)
Figure 2: AccuLoad IV QT Model
1.2.3 AccuLoad IV N4 Model

The NEMA 4 (N4) model has the following specifications:
• 304 Stainless steel, NEMA 4X-rated, weather-tight Class I, Division 2 rated
enclosure
• Up to two-arm operation
• Up to four single- or dual-pulse product meter inputs
• Up to four additive meter inputs with local input/output (I/O)
• Optional integrated card reader, indicator lights, and stop button
Page 8 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 3: AccuLoad IV N4 Model and MMI Module
1.2.4 AccuLoad IV SA Model

The Split Architecture (SA) model is comprised of one field control module (FCM)
and one or two man-machine interfaces (MMI). The FCM contains the I/O control
electronics that are connected to meters, valves, permissives, and other hardware; it
can be located for convenient access by service personnel. The MMI components are
the operator control panels and can be located for convenient access by drivers.
The SA model has the following specifications:
• 304 stainless steel, NEMA 4X-rated enclosure
• Up to 18-arm operation
• Up to 24 single- or dual-pulse product meter inputs
• Up to 56 additive meter inputs with the A4I I/O module or, with the remote A4I
module, up to 96 additive meter inputs
The MMI has an optional integrated card reader, indicator lights, and stop button.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 9

Figure 4: AccuLoad IV SA Model
DC WIRING TRAY
AC WIRING TRAY
DC WIRING TRAY
DC WIRING TRAY
'A' 'B' 'C' 'D'
1.3 Common Features of All Models

All AccuLoad IV models share the following features:
• Capable of transferring up to six different products on each arm
• Simultaneous operation of all arms
• Up to 24 additive injectors
• Metered
• Piston
• Smart
• Arms are individually configurable for a variety of operations:
• Straight (single product)
• Sequential blending
• Ratio blending
• Side-stream blending
• Hybrid (sequential/ratio) blending
• Wild-stream blending
• Unloading
• Single- or dual-channel meter pulse inputs representing volume or mass
• Modbus or Smith communications for monitoring/control via Ethernet or serial link
• Proximity card reader interface and driver ID database for access control
• Real-time diagnostic data displays
• Calculation of temperature, pressure, and density compensation factors
according to API guidelines for a broad spectrum of petroleum products from LPG to
asphalt as well as custom defined products
• Multilingual user interface
• User-configurable bill of lading (BOL)
• Event, transaction, and audit trail logs
• Five-point meter linearization
Page 10 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

• Built-in driver prompting

• Five levels of passcode protection for parameter access
• Arms can be operated independently or grouped for bay operation
• Arms can be configured to swing to either side of a lane
There are a significant number of additional features available and are described in detail
in the remainder of this manual.
1.4 Configuring for Operation

Because the AccuLoad provides the flexibility to support many variations and
features, it must be tailored to fit the specific application. The parameters which
make up the configuration are stored in a database in the AccuLoad and once the initial
setup is done, it remains permanently stored. The parameter database can
be modified using the front-panel touchscreen, by using AccuMate, a Windows
compatible companion program, or through a communications port using a web browser.
Regardless of the method used to access the configuration, the basic steps involved in
configuring the AccuLoad for initial operation are as follows:
1. Set the number and type of load arms.
2. Select the I/O points (analog, pulse, digital) to be connected to the process
equipment.
3. Select the units of measure.
4. Set the flow control parameters.
5. Define the products to be transferred.
6. Define any additive injectors.
7. Set up parameter security pass codes.
Once the configuration has been completed, the AccuLoad is ready for operation.
1.4.1 Load Arm Types

Arms are individually configurable for a variety of operations:
• Straight (single product)
• Sequential blending
• Ratio blending
• Side-stream blending
• Hybrid (sequential/ratio) blending
• Wild-stream blending
• Unloading
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 11

1.4.1.1 Straight
A straight arm is used to deliver a single product through a single meter.
Figure 5: Typical Straight Arm
1.4.1.2 Sequential Blending

Sequential blending is done by loading multiple products, one at a time, into a
vessel (for example, a tanker truck). This is most commonly done with products
that mix very easily.
Prerequisites:
• The load arm must be designated as a sequential blending arm and all required
I/O assignments (such as meter inputs, block valves, and flow control valve, etc.).
• A recipe which defines the percentage of each product to be blended
Operation:
The AccuLoad accomplishes sequential blending of multiple products as follows:
The ratio of varying products is designated in the recipe as a percentage of the total
preset. These percentages must total 100%. When the operator enters the preset,
the AccuLoad automatically calculates the actual volumes of each product to be
delivered. Each of these is delivered as a type of “mini-batch,” complete with
individual high flow rates, first trip volumes, etc. The order of product delivery
is included in the recipe definition.
If an incorrect product volume is delivered, the volumes of the remaining products
are adjusted accordingly. If this adjustment creates a blend tolerance alarm, the
operator will be prompted to stop or continue the batch. An exception to this rule is
when another delivery of the same product is specified in the recipe. In this case,
the volume of that product’s next delivery only is adjusted to maintain the correct
blend ratio and preset amount.
Page 12 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 6: Sequential Blending Arm
1.4.1.3 Ratio Blending

In ratio blending multiple products flow simultaneously during delivery to a vessel
(for example, a tanker truck). Ratio blending is used primarily when loading speed is
an issue or when the component products do not easily mix.
The AccuLoad IV accomplishes ratio blending of multiple products in the following
manner:
All products required for the recipe are delivered simultaneously through their own
meters (and their own corresponding pumps and control valves). Two-stage valves
are not used for ratio blending—only digital or analog valves are acceptable. The ratio
of the component products is designated in the recipe as a percentage of the total
preset. These percentages must total 100%.
When the operator enters the preset, the AccuLoad IV automatically calculates
the actual volumes of each product to be delivered. As stated above, products are
delivered simultaneously, each through its own meter. Flow rates are adjusted for
optimal blend accuracy while conforming to the programmed system flow profile
using Smith Meter’s exclusive control algorithm. Should flow rate variations occur,
the profile is dynamically adjusted to attain the best possible mix.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 13

Figure 7: Ratio Blending Arm
1.4.1.4 Hybrid Blending

The AccuLoad IV supports hybrid blending which is defined as a combination of
sequential blending and ratio blending. A typical hybrid blending arm configuration
may be three sequential products and one or two ratio products. The sequential
products flow one at a time and in most cases, one of the ratio products would flow
simultaneously with each of the sequential products. The ratio product(s) can be
plumbed either upstream or downstream of the sequential product meter. On a hybrid
arm there must be at least one sequential product configured.
The hybrid blending arm type is also used to support in-line blending (also referred
to as wild-stream blending). This feature is intended to be used in applications where
it is desired to continuously blend two or more products where a preset volume is not
normally used. In this configuration, the AccuLoad IV will monitor the flow through the
main product line and adjust the amount of blend product based on the amount of
main product flow. For more information on wild-stream blending, refer to application
bulletin AB06072.

Page 14 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 8: Hybrid Blending Arm
1.4.1.5 Side-Stream Blending

The AccuLoad supports side-stream blending, which is defined as two-product ratio
blending where the minor of the two products is metered and is controlled by a valve,
and the main product is free-flowing. Another meter and its corresponding control
valve are located downstream of where the two products merge. The AccuLoad also
supports side-stream blender arm proving. For more information on side-stream
blending, refer to Application Bulletin AB06054.
Figure 9: Side-Stream Blending Arm
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 15

1.4.1.6 Unloading
This arm type allows a truck compartment to be unloaded without entering a preset
volume. Implementing this feature requires that a load arm be identified as “unload-
ing”. For more information on unloading, refer to Application Bulletin AB06055.
Figure 10: Unloading Arm
1.4.1.7 Straight Arm With Vapor Recovery System (Straight with “VRS”)
This arm type supports delivering a single product while monitoring the amount of
vapor recovered. This feature requires a load-arm type to be programmed as
“Straight with VRS”. Two meters are required for this application to determine the
amount of vapor recovered while loading light density products. The AccuLoad
provides a vapor product total and a net mass total between the liquid product meter
and the vapor product meter in the system. For additional information refer to
AB06073.
Figure 11: Straight Arm With Vapor Recovery System (VRS)
Page 16 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

1.5 I/O Assignments

The specific I/O points used to connect the AccuLoad to the field equipment are
assigned by the user. The types of I/O supported by the AccuLoad are:

• Meter pulse inputs (product or additive meters)
• Pulse outputs
• Analog I/O (4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC)
• Discrete I/O (AC and DC)

The function associated with each I/O point is configured by the user. For example,
if an AC output signal is needed for pump control, the AccuLoad allows the user to
select any one of the AC outputs to be assigned that function. These selections are
made in the “Configuration” section of the parameter database.
The analog I/O requires the correct type of module to be installed in the unit as well
as the correct setting in the configuration database. There are six slots available on
the A4M board for analog I/O modules.
The AccuLoad accepts meter pulse inputs which represent increments of mass or
volume depending on the type of meter. The AccuLoad supports single-channel and
dual-channel meter connection with optional transmitter integrity. (Note—Using dual-
pulse meter inputs and transmitter integrity reduces the total number of meter inputs
available).
1.6 Units of Measure

In the AccuLoad, the units of measure are set by the user. These include the volume,
mass, temperature, pressure, and density. These parameters are set in the System
section of the configuration database and affect the operation of all arms configured
in the AccuLoad.
1.7 Flow Control

The AccuLoad gives the user full control of the flow profile used during delivery. A
typical profile consists of a period of lower flow rate delivery at the beginning of the
transfer (low flow start). Next, the flow rate is increased for most of the delivery (high
flow rate). Finally, the flow rate is reduced in stages at the end of the transfer (ramp
down).
Figure 12: Flow Rate Profile
900
First Stage Trip*
Flow Rate, UPM
600 Low Flow

Start Final Stage Trip*
Volume*
First High Flow Rate*
300
Second High Flow Rate*
Low Flow Start Rate*
0
2,000 60 0
Volume to be delivered
*Field programmable

There are parameters provided in the Flow Control sections of the configuration
database which allow the flow rate during each of these phases of the transfer to be
tailored to meet the safety, efficiency, and hydraulic requirements of the installation.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 17

1.8 Product Definition

The AccuLoad supports up to six base products to be transferred. The Arm->Meter->
Product sections of the configuration database define the characteristics of each
product. This includes:

• Meter factor curve
• Temperature
• Pressure compensation information
• Vapor pressure
• Others

A complete and detailed description of the fluid being measured helps the AccuLoad
to calculate the transferred quantities more accurately.
1.9 Additive Injection

The AccuLoad supports up to 24 additive injectors which can be a mix of piston,
metered, or smart. There are parameters in the System->Additives section of the
configuration database which allow the type and arrangement of the injectors to be
selected. Once the available injectors are defined, the pacing of the additive injection
is controlled by parameters in the Recipe section of the configuration database. The
I/O required to connect the injectors is defined in the Configuration and the
Communications sections of the database.
Page 18 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Operations
2 Operations
The AccuLoad has two primary modes of operation and are as follows:

• Run Mode
• Program Mode

In general, the Run Mode is used to perform transfers and the Program Mode
is used to configure and maintain the AccuLoad.
This description assumes operation of the AccuLoad using the front-panel touch
screen. For information on AccuLoad remote control options, refer to the AccuLoad
IV Smith Communications Manual MN06204L or the AccuLoad Modbus
Communications Manual MN06131L.
Figure 13: Main Menu Screen
2.1 Run Mode Overview

The AccuLoad powers up in the Run Mode which is the normal operational mode
used primarily to initiate loading or unloading transactions. The secondary function
provided in Run Mode is Dynamic Data Display.
At power-up, the AccuLoad is in the Run Mode and will display the ready screen.
The ready screen is shown below with no transactions in progress with a six arm
configuration and in daytime display mode.

Figure 14: Run Mode Ready Screen
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 19

2.1.1 Run Mode Options

The Run Mode screen allows the operator to control and monitor transactions. During a
typical transaction, the driver will perform the general sequence of steps as follows:
1. Enter the responses to any prompts.

2. Select the desired recipe to deliver.
3. Enter the amount to be delivered.
4. Start the transfer.
5. Confirm the end of the transfer.
Figure 15: Run Screen with Transactions in Progress (Two-Arm Configuration)
2.1.2 Typical Loading Sequence

There are many parameters in the configuration database which allow customization
of the AccuLoad operation. For instance, the number and type of any prompt
messages are selectable.
The following steps are one example of a typical loading sequence. Note that there
are many other sequence options available than what is shown.
1. Press the highlighted area to select the arm for the transaction.

Figure 16: Typical Loading Sequence—Select Arm
Page 20 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

2. Press the input field for the Driver ID entry.

Figure 17: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Driver ID, 1

3. Using the pop-up keypad, enter the Driver ID and press the (accept) button to
confirm. The (cancel) button will cancel the entry and return to the previous
screen. The (backspace) button will delete characters entered in error. The
(information) button provides help with the entry.
Figure 18: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Driver ID, 2

4. Press Next to continue.

Figure 19: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Driver ID 3

5. Press the data-entry field to enter the PIN number.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 21

Figure 20: Typical Loading Sequence—Enter Pin Number, 1

6. Enter the PIN number and press (accept) to accept the entry. Press
(cancel) to return to the prompt.


7. Press Next to continue.


Page 22 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8. Press the recipe button to change the recipe. The default recipe for this arm is
displayed.
Figure 24: Typical Loading Sequence—Recipe Selection, 1

9. Press the recipe to be loaded from the drop-down list and press Submit.


10. Once the correct recipe has been selected, press Next.

11. To display the numeric keypad to allow direction entry of a new preset amount,
perform either of the following actions:
• Press the preset amount field to display the numeric keypad to allow direct
entry of a new preset amount.
• Alternately press the plus/minus buttons to increment or decrement the
preset amount by the programmed amount.

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 23

12. Once the correct preset amount has been entered, press the Next button.

13. The AccuLoad displays the preset amount and the recipe for confirmation.
If everything is correct, press Start to begin the flow of product.


14. Once the transaction is started, the AccuLoad will display the status of the
transaction in the arm’s status panel area, as shown in the following diagram:
Figure 29: Typical Loading Sequence—Status of Transaction Diagram

Amount type
Progress Bar Delivered Amount and units

Flow Rate
Status Information
14. To stop flow on the arm, press the Stop icon (red square in circle) on the delivery
display for the arm.
Page 24 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

15. To stop flow on all arms, press the Stop All Arms button.

Figure 30: Typical Loading Sequence—Stop Flow on All Arms

16. When the batch has completed, another batch in this transaction can be started
(total accumulates) or the transaction can be ended.
If the transaction is ended, the AccuLoad returns to the Ready screen and prints a
transaction report (if configured to do so).
Figure 31: Typical Loading Sequence—Return to Ready Screen
2.1.3 System Status Display

The System Status Display feature is available in AccuLoad IV firmware versions 1.0
and higher. It provides an alternative view for Run Mode similar to the System Status
Display available in the AccuLoad III.
Figure 32: System Status Display
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 25

Figure 33: System Status Display
Top Panel
Bottom Panel

1 2 3 4 5
Columns
Top Panel—Arm In Focus

The top panel shows the arm that is currently in focus.
Bottom Panel—List View

The bottom panel shows the additional available arms.
Column 1—Arm Number/Arm Address

• When Program Code Parameter 1003—Board Set Function—is set to No
Split Arch or Dual HMI, the Arm Number will be displayed.
• When Program Code Parameter 1003—Board Set Function—is set to No
HMI, HMI A, or HMI B (i.e., split architecture is enabled), instead of the arm
number, the programmed arm address (as configured in the Program Mode
parameters below) will be displayed:
• 701—Arm 1 Address
Column 2—Recipe Name

• The recipe name is shown based on Recipe Program Code 002—Recipe Name
for the current or most recently selected recipe
Column 3—Remaining Volume/Unit Status
• Remaining Volume
• The preset remaining amount is displayed with the appropriate units
based on the parameters below, when Program Code 331—Run Display
Options—is set to “Default”:
• 332 Preset Amount Type, and either
• 303 Volume Descriptor, or
• 304 Mass Descriptor (when Preset Amount Type is “Mass”)
Page 26 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
• If Parameter 331—Run Display Options—is set to “No Down Count”

the preset remaining amount is not displayed.
• When the preset remaining amount is displayed, the remaining amount
is displayed in whole numbers.
• Arm Status
• The unit arm status is shown in place of the remaining volume amount
during the following conditions:
• Valve Opening—Message—Valve Opening
• Valve Closing—Message—Valve Closing
• Batch Done —Message—Batch Done
• Batch Paused—Message—Stopped
• Alarm—Message—<Alarm Name>
• Permissive—Message—Permissive not Met
• Presetting—Message—Preset in Progress
Note: When in Preset in Progress with an active alarm, the “Preset in
Progress” message and the active alarm name alternate
Column 4—Delivered Amount

• The delivered amount is displayed with the appropriate units as programmed
in Program Mode based on the following parameters:
• 333 Delivery Amount Type, and either
• 303 Volume Descriptor, or
• 304 Mass Descriptor (when Delivery Amount Type is “Mass”)
• The delivered amount resolution follows the 334 Display Resolution
parameter.
• The delivered amount displayed could be one of two options:
1. Batch delivered volume/mass
2. Transaction delivered volume/mass.
• If parameter 335 Delivered Amount Type is set to “Batch”, the batch
delivered amount is shown.
• If parameter 335 Delivered Amount Type is set to “Transaction”, the
transaction delivered amount is shown.
Column 5—Icons
• Start (Green right arrow icon)
• The Start icon indicates that an arm is idle and ready to be setup for a
transaction.
• The Start icon also functions as a start button.
• If an arm is idle and the Start button is selected, the arm is brought
into focus.
• If a transaction is in progress and paused, the transaction will be
restarted, and the arm is brought into focus.
• Stop (Red square icon)
• The Stop icon is used to show an arm is flowing.
• The Stop icon also functions as a stop button to stop flow.
• If the icon is selected during flow, flow will be stopped (the valve is
closed) and the arm will automatically be brought into focus.
• Alarm
• The alarm icon is used to show when an alarm is present on an arm.
• Permissive Lost
• The permissive icon is used to show when a permissive is not met.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 27
Column 6—Scroll Buttons

• Up and Down scroll buttons are shown on the right-hand side of the system
status display when there are more than six arms configured to be displayed
on the HMI.
• The scroll buttons move one row up or one row down per click based on the
button selected and cycle, in a circular manner, through the idle arms.
• Arms that have a transaction in progress or preset in progress, with or without
an active alarm, are not affected by the scroll buttons and will remain in view.

2.1.4 Idle Arms
• When an arm is idle the arm name as programmed in parameter Arm 107—Load
Arm ID—will be displayed across the row.
• If an alarm occurs that affects an arm that is idle, the alarm name is displayed
across the row in place of the arm name.
• Program Code Arm 1610—Idle Arm Alarm—Applies only to Split Architecture
• If configured for Stop Arms and six arms are in an active transaction or in
preset and an alarm occurs on an idle arm, the Idle Arm Alarm message (not
a true alarm) is shown indicating there is a problem and flow is stopped on
all active arms.
• If configured for “Don’t Stop Arms” and six arms are in an active transaction
or in preset and an alarm occurs on an idle arm, the Idle Arm Alarm message
is not shown and flow will continue on all active arms.
2.1.5 Arm Focus

• Arms shown in the bottom panel can be selected from the HMI to bring the arm
into focus on the top panel by touching the desired arm in the list.
• The arm that was previously in focus will move to the bottom panel and be
displayed in the appropriate location based on the Arm Number/Arm Address
and the state of the arm.
• If an arm displayed in the bottom panel is started or stopped using a Remote
Start or Remote Stop input switch, the arm will remain in the bottom panel (it is
not automatically brought into focus on the top pane).
• Communications commands are also capable of changing the arm focus via the
Smith “FS” command or via Modbus Extended Services command.
• Inhibit Auto Focus
• If Program Code System 734—Inhibit Auto Focus—is set to “Yes”, arms are
prevented from automatically being given focus priority when the following
Smith Commands are used:
• SB/SF
• AP
• WD
• WX
• WP
• WQ
Example: If Arm 1 is in focus and one of the commands listed above is sent
to Arm 5, Arm 1 will remain in focus in the top pane.
Note: The FS command will still cause the arm to change focus even if Inhibit
Auto Focus is set to “Yes”.
• If Inhibit Auto Focus is set to “No”, the arm focus will automatically change when
one of the commands listed above is sent to an arm.
• Example: If Arm 1 is in focus and one of the commands listed above is sent
to Arm 5, Arm 5 will be displayed in the top pane. Arm 1 will be moved to the
bottom pane. If these commands are sent to multiple arms, the last arm
receiving the command will have focus.
Page 28 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
2.1.6 Arm Display Precedence

• A limit of six arms per HMI can be in a transaction or in a presetting state at the
same time.
• Arms are always listed in ascending order based on the column 1 value (arm
number or arm address, as described previously).
• When configured for Split Architecture, active arms will always be displayed on
the top of the list of available arms in the bottom pane. Otherwise, these arms
are also ordered in ascending order based on the arm address.
2.1.7 Alarm Reporting

The AccuLoad will post an alarm when an error condition is detected. For example,
an alarm is generated if the flow rate exceeds the allowed range or if the valve
malfunctions.
A complete listing of the alarms can be found in this manual in Section 8, Program
Code Reference, and in the Smith Communications manual MN06204L. The default
actions taken by the AccuLoad when an alarm occurs are:

• Post a message on the display.
• Shut down flow on the associated arm.
• Record the occurrence in the alarm log.
Figure 34: Typical Ready Screen Alarm Message
There are configurable options which can be set for each default alarm type as follows:
• Allow Run mode clearing

• Energize alarm relay output number one
• Energize alarm relay output number two
• Notify via e-mail
• Allow flow to continue
2.1.8 Allow Run/Ready Mode Clearing

This option controls whether the selected alarm can be cleared while in the Run
mode. If enabled, this will allow the driver to clear the alarm without entering program
mode (no passcode required).
2.1.9 Energize Alarm Relay Output One/Two

This selection will determine if the alarm output will be energized when an alarm
occurs. This option requires that the particular digital output has been configured as
an alarm output.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 29
2.1.10 Notify Via E-mail

Selecting this option results in the AccuLoad issuing an e-mail message to the
designated recipient upon the occurrence of this alarm. Multiple parameters in the
communications section of the configuration database (System Communications
directory, parameters 742-747) must be set up for this option to function correctly.
2.1.11 Allow Flow to Continue

By default, the AccuLoad will stop flow for all alarms. This option will override the
default and allow flow to continue.
2.1.12 Permissive Inputs

The AccuLoad can be configured to monitor the status of digital inputs for permissive
control. Up to two inputs can be configured as System Permissives and affect all arms.
Up to three can be configured that are specific to a particular arm (Arm Permissives).
Typically, these would be used to monitor safety systems (grounding, overfill etc.),
stop flow, and display a message to the operator if a problem is detected.
Important: The AccuLoad should never be relied on to act as the primary safety
system control for the flow valve and pump controls, for example, emergency stop,
overfill, ground protection, etc.
These should always be handled by separate systems specifically designed for that
application. For example, safety systems specifically to meet SIL requirements. Any
power control circuits from these external systems shall be wired in series ahead of
the AccuLoad to remove power to the ancillary devices. See MN06201 for connection
details.
For example, to enable a permissive input to monitor the status of the ground
detection system, the following would be required:
• Configure a digital input as a system permissive or as an arm permissive input.
• Define a message to be displayed to the operator when the permissive signal is
lost. For example, the message might be “Connect Ground”.
• Configure at what times the AccuLoad should monitor the permissive input
state. Available options are:
• Transaction Star—Permissive only checked immediately after
authorization.
• Continuous—Permissive must be met continuously during the batch.
• Start Pressed—Permissive must be met whenever flow is started.
• Batch Start—Permissive must be met to start a batch.
• Once configured as previously described, if this permissive is lost during a batch,
the flow will be stopped. There is another configuration parameter which controls
the way the flow is resumed with options as follows:
• Manual—Start must be pressed to restart flow.
• Automatic—Flow will be started as soon as the permissive signal is
restored.
For this example (ground fault detection) the Continuous option would be used
so that the AccuLoad will prohibit loading any time the ground is not connected.
Either restart option could be used.
With this configuration, the operator is able to enter the loading information
without connecting the ground. However, the batch would not start and the
message, “Connect Ground”, would be displayed if the operator tried to start
the batch. Also, if the ground permissive signal is lost anytime during the batch,
the AccuLoad would stop flow and display the “Connect Ground” message.
Page 30 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

2.1.13 Main Menu Operation

The Main Menu is the starting point for all non-transaction related operation of the
AccuLoad. To get to the Main Menu from the Ready screen, press the Main button in
the top left corner of the screen as shown.
Note: If a transaction is in progress, the Main menu is not available.
Figure 35: Return to Main Menu
2.2 Program Mode Overview

To modify the AccuLoad configuration, enter Program Mode by pressing the Program
Mode option from the main menu.
Figure 36: Program Mode

Program mode provides a means to modify the AccuLoad configuration database.
Modifying the configuration with program mode allows the end user to customize the
behavior of the AccuLoad to meet the operational requirements of the installation.
The AccuLoad can be configured to require a passcode and an external enable
contact input before granting access to make parameter changes. In general,
Program mode access should be controlled since the settings in the database can
affect critical measurement and operational functions. Local weights and measures
jurisdictions may require password protection of some or all of the operating
parameters that are accessible through Program Mode.
A complete description of the security features provided by the AccuLoad can be
found in Section 2.9 of this manual.
Detailed information regarding the individual parameters that can be configured in
Program Mode is included this manual. See Section 8 Program Code Reference.
Note: If security passcodes have been enabled, the AccuLoad will display a prompt
to enter the passcode before granting access to the Program Mode.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 31
2.2.1 Program Mode Menu

From the top level Program Mode menu, the directory selections are:
• Configuration
• System
• Bays
• Arms
• Recipes
• Split Architecture
• Cancel and Exit
• Save and Exit
Figure 37: Program Mode Directories
2.2.1.1 Configuration Directory Overview

The Configuration directory contains options defining the load arm layout and how I/O
points are connected to meters, valves, pumps, injectors, etc.
The Configuration database (often called Program Mode) is organized in sections as
follows:

Configuration Subdirectories:
• System Layout
• Pulse Inputs
• Pulse Outputs
• Digital Inputs
• Digital Outputs
• Analog I/O
Figure 38: Configuration Subdirectories
Page 32 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

2.2.1.2 System Directory Overview
This section is used to set operating parameters which affect the operation of the entire
AccuLoad.
System Subdirectories:
• General Purpose
• Flow Control
• Volume Accuracy
• Temperature/Density
• Pressure
• Alarms
• Communications
• Additives
• Security
Figure 39: System Directory Subdirectories
2.2.1.3 Bays Directory Overview

This section is for configuration of items that is specific to dual bays controlled by one
AccuLoad i.e. swing arm applications.
Figure 40: Bays Directory Subdirectories

Subdirectories include:
• Bay 1
• Bay 2
2.2.1.4 Arms Directory Overview

This section is used to set parameters that affect the operation of a single arm—one
section for each up to six maximum.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 33

Figure 41: Arms Directory Subdirectories
• General Purpose
• Flow Control
• Volume Accuracy
• Communications
• Meters
• Products

2.2.1.5 Recipes Directory Overview
This section is used to pre-define specific combinations of products and additives that
can be selected for delivery by the AccuLoad—one section for each of 50 recipes
maximum.
Figure 42: Recipes Directory Subdirectories
• Product Blend
• Recipe Additives
2.2.1.6 Split Architecture Directory Overview
Figure 43: Split Architecture Directory Subdirectories
Page 34 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

• Configuration
• Board Addresses
2.2.2 Database Modification Using Front Panel or Browser

The following sequence illustrates the process of modifying a parameter in the
AccuLoad database using the built-in menu system. The parameters in the
configuration database can also be changed through communications using the
AccuMate program running on a PC or by using the Modbus protocol. For other
methods, see the AccuLoad IV Smith Communications manual MN06204L and the
AccuLoad Modbus Communications manual MN06131L.
The following example is a sequence of screens shows an example of entering
program mode, changing a parameter (the AccuLoad ID) and then exiting.
1. At the Main menu, press Program Mode. Note the AccuLoad Unit ID “AccuLoad
IV” displayed in the middle of the top line of the display.

Figure 44: Program Mode
2. Enter the security passcode and select the checkmark (optional depending on
security configuration, see Section 2.

Figure 45: Security Passcode Entry
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 35

3. If the passcode is correct, the top-level Program Mode menu is displayed. From
here press the System menu.

Figure 46: System Menu

4. The System top level menu is displayed. From here, press the General Purpose
menu. Note the “bread crumb” bar across the top shows each menu level as it
entered. Pressing any of the bread crumb menu levels will navigate directly back
to that menu level.

Figure 47: System—General Purpose

5. Select the Unit ID parameter which is currently set to AccuLoad IV.
The current setting for the Unit ID parameter is displayed with a keyboard to
enter a new value.
Figure 48: System—General Purpose
Page 36 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 49: System—Unit ID

6. Select the Unit ID field and change the Unit ID from AccuLoad IV to AL IV Unit ID.

Figure 50: System—Change Unit ID, 1

7. Press the checkmark button to accept the changes.

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 37
8. Press the far left bread crumb to return to the top level program mode menu.
The Unit ID displayed at the top of the screen is still reads AccuLoad IV since the
change has not been saved to the database.

8. Press the Save and Exit option to permanently save the change in the AccuLoad
database.

After exiting Program Mode, the Unit ID displayed at the top of the screen is
changed to “AL IV Unit ID”.

Page 38 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
2.2.3 Program Mode Directory Map

This outline shows the top-level organization of directories and subdirectories for the
AccuLoad’s Program Mode database. Note that the configuration code range is used
for making program code changes via Communications. See the Communication
Manual (MN06131L).

Configuration Directories
Code Description
000 Load Arm Configuration Directory
100 Pulse Input Directory
200 Pulse Output Directory
300 Digital Input Directory
500 Digital Output Directory
900 Analog Input and Output Directory

System Directories
Code Description
100 General Purpose Directory
200 Flow Control Directory
300 Volume Accuracy Directory
400 Temperature/Density Directory
500 Pressure Directory
600 Alarm Configuration Directory
700 Communications Directory
800 Additive Directory
Load Arm Directories

Code Description
700 Communications Directory
Meter Directories
Code Description
Product Directories
Code Description
Bay Directories
Code Description
700 Communications

Recipe Directories
Recipes 01 through 50
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 39

2.2.4 Viewing the Help Messages

The AccuLoad includes unique Help messages that allow the operator to have the
ability to review what is required or what the options are for an individual program
code. Click on the icon next to a program code to see the help messagefor that
parameter.
2.2.5 Security
The AccuLoad provides a comprehensive set of features to control access to the
parameters in the configuration database including:
• Security switch inputs
• Passcodes
• Communications
• Diagnostics
2.2.5.1 Security Levels

The AccuLoad can be configured to use up to five levels of security to control access
to parameters. Security level one is the least privileged and level five is the most. For
example, a technician could be allowed to change a small set of parameters by using
the level one passcode to enter Program Mode and a weights and measures official
could have complete access by using the level five passcode to enter program mode.
2.2.5.2 Security Level Activation

A security level is activated by assigning a passcode in the Security section of the
System directory in the configuration database. It’s not required that all security
levels be activated but if one security level is activated then Level 5 security level
must also be programmed to assure the proper functionality of the audit trail log.
Each parameter in the database can be individually assigned any active security
level.
The AccuLoad will not allow a parameter to be changed unless the user has entered
program mode using the passcode of the assigned level or higher.
The factory-default security level for most parameters is level 1. Meter K factors,
linearization factors, and a few other settings that typically need to be secured are
set to level 5 by default.
2.2.5.3 Parameter Security Level Assignment

This controls who can access those parameters in Program Mode and also affects
how change events are logged. Parameter changes are normally recorded in the
Event Log. Parameters assigned to Level 4 or 5 are tracked in the Audit Trail Log.
The individual assignment of parameter security levels is handled using the
companion AccuMate application. See MN06136 for operational details of the
AccuMate program.
Note: The operator must enter the password for the highest security level
programmed in the unit to access any data on the security menu.
The Set Parameter Security option in the Security menu can be used from the
display interface to globally set all non-metrological parameters to a certain security
level (for example, level 3).
2.2.5.4 Security Switches

The AccuLoad may be configured to require one or two security contact inputs to be
activated before database changes can be made. These are typically wired to key
switches and provide additional protection options. If one of the two security switches
are set for a certain security level, then that switch must be active to access that level
of security (in addition to any passcode that may be configured for the level).
Page 40 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

2.2.5.5 Communications Security

Parameter changes can be performed via communications and the AccuLoad allows
the security level associated with requests received on a communications port to be
assigned a security level. The parameter that sets the communications security
level is called Comm Link Programming (Code 731 from AccuMate) and is found
in the System->Communications->Host Interface directory. If no communication
parameter change access is allowed by the authority having jurisdiction, then the
parameter must be set to Alarm Clear Only, otherwise it will be set to a security level,
usually level 4 or 5 to have the events recorded in the audit trail.
2.2.5.6 Diagnostics Security

The security level required to access the diagnostic functions is also programmable.
The Diagnostic Security Level is set in the System->Security directory. If this
parameter is set, the AccuLoad will prompt for a passcode before granting access to
the diagnostic screens.
2.2.5.7 Security Configuration Example

The AccuLoad is shipped from the factory with no security configured, so initially
there is no need for a passcode or user supplied (optional) key switch signal to
enter Program Mode, and once in Program Mode all parameters (including security
settings) are read/write accessible. Be aware that changes to security settings
require entry to Program Mode at the highest currently configured level.
In this example, use the following access categories:
• Weights and measures officials/measurement/proving personnel—External
contact input and passcode.
This group should have read/write access to all settings including meter
factors, K factors, and other metrologically significant parameters. This group
should be the only group permitted to change security related settings. Both a
passcode and activation of the security switch input are required to gain access
at this level.
• Maintenance technicians—passcode only.
This group should have read/write access to all non-metrologically significant
parameters, functional diagnostics, etc.
• Operators—passcode only.
This group has read/write access to non-metrological parameters only.

Since there are three groups with different access requirements, this requires
configuring three different security levels in the AccuLoad. Assuming the AccuLoad is
factory default and no security has been previously configured, the following steps
are used to configure the AccuLoad for this example:
1. Enter Program Mode (no passcode needed).
2. Set a passcode for levels 5, 2, and 1.
3. Select Security 1 for the function of the digital input connected to the first security
key switch (Configuration -> Digital Inputs).
4. Set the security level associated with the first security switch input. In this case,
use Level 5 to make it the Proving personnel key switch.
5. Use the Set Parameter Security function in the Security menu to set all
parameters to Level 2.
6. Ensure that the security levels for the meter factors and K factors are at the
highest level (Level 5) for changes to be audited and protected by the switch.
7. Set the security level for non-metrological product, recipe, flow control, and alarm
program codes to Level 1.
8. Ensure the key switch input is wired.
9. Exit Program Mode.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 41

The AccuLoad requires the correct passcode and an active key switch input before
granting the read/write access to Program Mode at Level 5. For Level 1 and Level 2,
only the correct passcode is required.
For complete control, the security level associated with communications should be
set. For this example, setting the Comm Link Programming parameter in the
communications section of the database to Level 2 is appropriate. This would allow
full access to the configuration database via the AccuMate except for the meter
factors and K factors.
Note: Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) may require parameters other than those
that are set by factory default to be set to either Level 4 or 5 to be logged in the audit
trail. This is determined at commissioning (initial verification).

Page 42 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Dynamic Displays
3 Dynamic Displays
The Dynamic Display section describes informational displays that can be viewed
while in the Run or Ready Mode. These displays are dynamic because the
displayed values reflect current actual conditions and continuously update while
being viewed.
The following steps describe how to navigate the menus to view the current flow rate
of Product 2 on Arm 1.
1. Select the Dynamic Displays option from the main menu.
Figure 56: Dynamic Displays Menu

2. Select the Load Arms to display the load arm selection menu.

Figure 57: Dynamic Displays Menu—Load Arms

3. Select Load Arm 1 to view product data.
Figure 58: Dynamic Displays—Load Arm 1

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 43

4. Press Product to view data by product type.
Figure 59: Dynamic Displays—Product 1, 1
5. Select Product 2 for data display on the product.


Note: System Directory Parameter 313—Dynamic Display Timeout—can be used

to automatically return to the Ready screen after a period of inactivity while viewing
a Dynamic Display screen.

3.1 Dynamic Displays
Dynamic display data is grouped into five categories:
• System
• Load Arms
• Recipe
• Injector Rates
• Diagnostics
Page 44 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

3.1.1 System Dynamic Displays
Figure 62: System Dynamic Displays
System dynamic displays show all data that is common to the entire AccuLoad. A listing
of system dynamic displays, as well as the format in which the information appears, is
displayed in the table below:
Description Display Format

Current Flow Rate in Units/Min for Arm 1 Flow (Arm 1) XXXXX.X Gal/Min
Current Flow Rate in Units/Hour for Arm 1 Flow (Arm 1) XXXXXXX.X Gal/Hr
Current Recipe for Arm 1 Recipe (Arm 1) NNNNNNNNN
Preset and delivered for Arm 1 Arm 1 Preset XXXXXX Del XXXXXX
3.1.2 Load Arms Dynamic Displays

Load Arm dynamic displays are divided into the following categories:
• Product
• Batch
• Transaction
• Blend
• Ratio Blend Data
• Recipes
• Injector Rates
• Flow Controlled Additives
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 45
3.1.2.1 Product Dynamic Displays

Product dynamic displays show all data associated with a specific product. If Product
Dynamic Displays is selected, a menu appears listing all products associated with
that load arm. (If only one product is available on the selected load arm, this screen is
omitted.) Each load arm can accommodate up to six products.
Figure 63: Product Dynamic Displays
If user-defined names have been assigned to these products, they will appear on this
menu. If no user-defined name has been configured, the products will be listed as
Product 1, Product 2, etc.
A listing of product dynamic displays, as well as the format in which the information
appears, is displayed in the following table:

Current Flow Rate in Units/Min Flow (Arm 1) XXXXX.X Gal/Min
Current Flow Rate in Units/Hour Flow XXXXXXX.X Gal/Hr
Current and Average Temperature Temperature Cur Avg XXXX.XF XXXX.XF
Current and Average Density @ Observed Temperature Dens Cur Avg XXXX.X XXXX.X KgM3
Average API @ Reference Temperature Avg Dens @ ref temp XXXX.X APJ
Average Reference Density @ Reference Temperature Avg Dens @ ref temp XXXX.X kg/m3
Average Relative Density @ Reference Temperature Avg Rel Dens @ ref temp X.XXXX
Relative Density @ 60°F and Current Pressure Avg Rel Dens @ 60°F and PRS X.XXXX
Reference Density @ Reference Density Temperature Ref Dens @ ref dens temp XXXX.X kg/m3
Current Reference Density @ Reference Temperature Cur Ref Dens @ ref temp XXXX.X kg/m3
Batch Average Pressure Batch Avg Press XXXX.X PSI
Batch Average Vapor Pressure Avg Vapor Press XXXX.X PSI
Current and Average Meter Factor Mfac Cur Avg X.XXXXX X.XXXXX
Batch Average CTPL Batch Avg CTPL X.XXXXX
Batch Average CTL Batch Avg CTL X.XXXX
Batch Average CPL Batch Avg CPL X.XXXX
Actual Percentage of Batch Actual Blend % XXX%
Desired Percentage of Batch Desired Blend % XXX%
Instantaneous Blend Percentage Instantaneous Blend % XX.X
Deviation Count (Error Between Desired and Actual Volume) Deviation Count XXXX.XX
Page 46 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)


Indicated (Raw) Volume IV Batch XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross Batch Volume GV Batch XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature Batch GST Batch XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature and Pressure Batch GSV Batch XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Mass Amount Batch Mass Batch XXXXXXX.XX Lbs
Raw Transaction Volume Transaction IV Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross Transaction Volume Transaction GV Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature Transaction GST Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature and Pressure Transaction GSV Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Mass Transaction Amount Transaction Mass Trans XXXXXXX.XX Lbs
Current Valve Requested Position Valve Requested Closed
3.1.2.2 Batch Dynamic Displays
Batch Dynamic Displays, from the Load Arm Dynamic Displays menu, shows all data
associated with a specific batch.
A listing of batch dynamic displays, as well as the format in which the information

Recipe Name and Number Recipe XX NNNNNNNNN
Indicated (Raw) Batch Volume IV Batch XXXXXXX.X Gal
Gross Batch Volume GV Batch XXXXXXX.X Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature GST Batch XXXXXXX.X Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature and Pressure GSV Batch XXXXXXX.X Gal
Mass Batch Amount Mass Batch XXXXXXX.X Gal
Batch Average Temperature Batch Avg Temp XXXX.X°F
Batch Average Density Batch Avg Dens XXXX.X Lb/F3
Batch Average Pressure Batch Avg Press XXXX.X Psi
Batch Average Meter Factor Batch Avg Mtr Factor X.XXXXX
Batch Average CTL Batch Avg CTL X.XXXX
Batch Average CPL Batch Avg CPL X.XXXX
Additive 1 Batch Total Add 1 Batch XXXXXX.XXX Gal
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 47


Batch Mass Vapor Recovery Meter Vapor Recovered XXXXXXX.XX lbs
Batch Mass Net Volume for VRS Delivered Net XXXXXXX.XX lbs
3.1.2.3 Transaction Dynamic Displays

Transaction Dynamic Displays, from the Load Arm Dynamic Displays menu, shows
all data associated with a specific batch. Only those additive injectors configured for
this load arm will be included in the transaction dynamic displays.
A listing of batch dynamic displays, as well as the format that the information
appears in, is displayed in the following table:

Indicated (Raw) Transaction Volume IV Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross Transaction Volume GV Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature Volume GST Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Gross at Standard Temperature and Pressure GSV Trans XXXXXXX.XX Gal
Mass Transaction Volume Mass Trans XXXXXXX.XX Lbs
Transaction Average Temperature Trans Avg Temp XXXX.X°F
Transaction Average Density Trans Avg Dens XXX.X Lb/F3
Transaction Average Pressure Trans Avg Press XXXX.X Psi
Transaction Average Meter Factor Trans Avg Mtr Factor X.XXXXX
Transaction Average CTL Trans Avg CTL X.XXXX
Transaction Average CPL Trans Avg CPL X.XXXX
Injector 1 Transaction Total Add 1 Trans XXXXXX.XXX Gal
Page 48 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)


Mass Transaction Volume Vapor Recovery Meter Vapor Recovered XXXXXXX.XX lbs
Mass Transaction Net Volume for VRS Delivered Net XXXXXXX.XX lbs
3.1.2.4 Blend Dynamic Displays

Blend dynamic displays show all data associated with a specific sequential blending
transaction. Selecting Blend from the Dynamic Displays menu displays the
following data:
Figure 64: Blend Dynamic Displays
3.1.2.5 Ratio Blend Data Dynamic Displays

Ratio blend data dynamic displays show all data associated with a specific ratio
blending transaction. Selecting “Ratio Blend” from the Dynamic Displays menu
displays the following information:
Figure 65: Ratio Blend Data Dynamic Displays
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 49

3.1.2.6 Density Sampling Dynamic Displays
Density sampling dynamic displays apply only to unloading arms. The screen displays
up to ten density samples taken during the batch. Selecting Density Sampling from
the Dynamic Displays menu displays the following information:
Figure 66: Density Sampling Dynamic Displays
Each of the samples is a flow-weighted average over the delta volume programmed
in Product Parameter 415. The last complete density sample is considered the
density of the pure uncontaminated product when the contaminant percentage is
calculated.
3.1.2.7 Recipe Dynamic Displays

Recipe dynamic displays show all data associated with a programmed recipe.
A listing of recipe dynamic displays, as well as the format in which the information
appears, is displayed in the following graphic:
Figure 67: Recipe Dynamic Displays
3.1.2.8 Injector Rates Dynamic Displays

Injector dynamic displays show all data associated with specific injectors. Twenty-four
injectors are available for use but the AccuLoad will display only those that are
configured.
If the Injector dynamic displays are accessed from the main Dynamic Display menu
then all additive injectors configured for the AccuLoad will be included in the displays.
However, if the Injector Rates dynamic displays are accessed from the Load Arm
dynamic displays, then only the additive injectors configured for the particular load
arm will be displayed.
A listing of injector dynamic displays, as well as the format in which the information

Injector 1 Current Pulse Rate Inj 1 Prg XXX Cal XXXX.XX
Page 50 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Injector 11 Transaction Total Inj 11 Prg XXX Cal XXXX.XX
3.1.2.9 Flow Controlled Additives Dynamic Displays
The following screen is an example of the information that is available on the

display for all configured flow controlled additives. If additives are not temperature
compensated, Batch Average CTL, current and average temperature, GST values,
GSV values, and Mass values are not displayed.
Figure 68: Flow Controlled Additives Dynamic Displays
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 51

3.1.3 Diagnostics Dynamic Displays Menu
Diagnostics options from the dynamic displays menu allows the operator to view
current conditions, identify causes of system errors, and analyze data collected by
the AccuLoad. Diagnostic options available are listed below and are shown in the
following graphic:
Figure 69: Diagnostic Dynamic Displays Options
Note: The diagnostics available through the Dynamic Displays menu are run-time
diagnostics only. Program mode diagnostics are accessed from the Main Menu.
The Diagnostics menu available through the Dynamic Display consists of the
following options:
• Active Alarms
• Alarm History
• Non-Resettable Volumes
• Event Log
• Transaction Log
• Audit Trail
• Digital Input
• Digital Output
• Analog I/O
• Pulse Inputs
• Pulse Outputs
• Reset Dual Pulse Errors
• Solenoid Actuation Count
• Valve Closure Data
• Meter Pulse Inputs
• Boolean Algebraic
• Injector
• Engineering
• Network
• Update Driver Database
• Update Firmware
• Update License
• Force Update
• Serial Monitor
• Connected Devices
• Exit
Page 52 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

3.1.3.1 Active Alarms Diagnostics
Displays all currently active alarms associated with any of the arms.
Figure 70: Active Alarms
The active alarms can be cleared from this display by pressing the Clear button. The
AccuLoad will then ask for the passcode. When the passcode is entered, the alarm
will clear.
3.1.3.2 Alarm History Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu provides the selection of Alarm History where the most recent
alarms can be viewed. Select the Alarm History button, then select a load arm
and the historical alarms will be displayed. The alarms will be listed in order of
occurrence.
Figure 71: Alarm History
This is an alarm history for the arm. The Event Log screen provides a more complete
history of alarms for all arms.
Pressing the up and down arrow buttons will allow the operator to page through the
Alarm History displays. If “More…” is not displayed, then there is only one screen of
alarms in the alarm history.
3.1.3.3 Non-Resettable Volumes Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu provides the selection of non-resettable volumes where the
product, additive injector, and recipe totalizer amounts can be viewed as shown on
the following screen:
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 53
Figure 72: Non-Resettable Volumes
Product volumes are displayed per arm as shown on the following screen:
Figure 73: Product Volumes
Additive injector values are displayed as shown in the following screen:
Figure 74: Additive Injector Values
Press Recipes, then select a specific recipe to view that recipe’s totalizers:
Figure 75: Recipes Selection
3.1.3.4 Event Log Diagnostics
The View Only Diagnostics menu option of Event Log is where past events can be
viewed. The Event Log includes alarms, transaction start, and transaction end events,
Page 54 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

and, program mode parameter changes. Each entry includes the date/time of the
event and the associated detailed event description.
Figure 76: Event Log
3.1.3.5 Transaction Log Diagnostics
The Transaction Log displays the details of a current or past transaction. Totals for the
transaction and for each batch can be viewed as shown in the following screens:
Figure 77: Transaction Log
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 55


Note: Additive totals will be displayed only for those injectors used in the transaction.
3.1.3.6 Audit Trail Diagnostics
The audit trail provides the date, time, and description of program mode changes
that are relevant to weights and measures. Note that only changes to parameters
secured at the two highest security levels programmed are logged in the audit trail.
All metrologically significant program codes should be set to the highest two levels.
Reference Security Section 2.2.5 for further details.
Figure 78: Audit Trail Diagnostics
3.1.3.7 Digital Inputs Diagnostics
This diagnostic provides information on digital input states.
Figure 79: Digital Inputs
Page 56 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

3.1.3.8 Digital Outputs Diagnostics
It is possible to monitor the state of the outputs on the AccuLoad via this diagnostic.
With the proper access level, outputs from this diagnostic to assist in startup and
troubleshooting can be toggled.
Figure 80: Digital Outputs

3.1.3.9 Analog Input/Output (I/O) Diagnostics
From the Analog I/O diagnostic, the data associated with the analog inputs and
outputs can be viewed. In addition, given a sufficient level of access, it is possible
to override the analog output engineering values manually from this diagnostic for
startup and troubleshooting purposes.
Figure 81: Analog I/O
3.1.3.10 Pulse Inputs Diagnostics
From the Pulse Input diagnostic, the pulse counts associated with the meter pulse
inputs can be viewed. In addition, given a sufficient level of access it is possible to
access a ‘test’ mode that permits the resetting of the pulse counts manually for
startup and troubleshooting purposes.
Figure 82: Pulse Inputs
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 57

3.1.3.11 Pulse Outputs Diagnostics
From the Pulse Outputs diagnostic, it is possible to enter a frequency and a specific
pulse count for testing and start/stop for each of the output pulse streams.
Figure 83: Pulse Outputs
3.1.3.12 Reset Dual Pulse Errors Diagnostics
From the Reset Dual Pulse Errors diagnostic, it is possible to clear any built up error
pulse counts that have accumulated for an arm.
Figure 84: Reset Dual Pulse Errors
3.1.3.13 Solenoid Actuation Count Diagnostics
The AccuLoad IV provides counters to track the upstream and downstream

solenoid actuations. Separate counters will be available for both the upstream and
downstream solenoid of each meter. The counter will be incremented each time the
solenoid is energized. The counters can also be cleared or set to a specific value via
this diagnostic, with sufficient security access.
Figure 85: Solenoid Actuation Count Diagnostics
Note: The counters will be cleared by a factory initialization of firmware upgrade. The
registers may also be read and modified (set or cleared) via communications.
Page 58 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

3.1.3.14 Valve Closure Database Diagnostics
This command retrieves the time it takes for the product flow control valve to
completely close, retrieves the volume of product that has been delivered after the
STOP button (or remote stop) has been pressed, and indicates the flow rate. This
command will also measure the volume and time if there is a loss of permissive
resulting in valve closure or if a communication command is issued to stop the batch.
Select a meter to view the time, volume, and flow rate of the valve closure.
Figure 86: Valve Closure Database Diagnostics
3.1.3.15 Meter Pulse Inputs Diagnostics
Selecting this diagnostic will result in a screen that indicates the number of pulses
received by the respective pulse input. This diagnostic should not be used to verify
the actual meter pulses received for any batch or transaction. It is intended as a
method of verifying pulse input wiring to the respective pulse input on the AccuLoad.
Applying pulses to the respective input will cause the respective counter to
increment.
Figure 87: Meter Pulse Inputs
Note: If Dual Pulse is enabled, “Reset Dual Pulse Errors” will appear as a menu
option on the screen. See description under Reset Dual Pulse Errors.
3.1.3.16 Boolean/Algebraic Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu provides the selection “Boolean Algebraic” to view Boolean/
Algebraic registers and their results. General-purpose timers can also be viewed from
this diagnostic.
Boolean Algebraic Equation line status with User Boolean and Float values:
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 59

Figure 88: Boolean/Algebraic Diagnostics

See the AccuMate online help for further information.
Figure 89: General Purpose Timers Diagnostics
3.1.3.17 Engineering Diagnostics
The diagnostic screen, shown in the following screen, is a combination of the analog
and digital input low level status for factory testing.
Figure 90: Engineering Diagnostics
3.1.3.18 Network Diagnostics
Displays Network Diagnostics for each of the network interfaces in the AccuLoad IV.
Figure 91: Network Diagnostics

Page 60 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
3.1.3.19 Update Driver Database Diagnostics
The Update Drive Database diagnostic allows for direct addition of new driver
information to the database New driver information can be added manually or by
presenting a previously unused card to the reader while in this diagnostic.
Figure 92: Update Driver Database Diagnostics
3.1.3.20 Update Firmware Diagnostics
The update firmware diagnostic is intended to provide a mechanism to authenticate

a firmware upgrade. Upgrades can be accomplished without using this diagnostic if
the communications interface being used has sufficient privileges. In the case where
the configuration does not permit updates from being initiated automatically, this
diagnostic allows the “confirmation” of the desire to upgrade via the AccuLoad IV.
Note: If the firmware lock function located under the weights and measures
calibration menu (see Section 5) is enabled, firmware updates are inhibited until
the firmware lock is disabled. This action will then be recorded in the audit trail.
3.1.3.21 Update License Diagnostics
If a new feature license was obtained from the factory to expand the maximum
number of load arms or add additional features beyond the original licensed capacity,
the new feature license can be uploaded to the AccuLoad IV via AccuMate. Afterward,
this diagnostic must be utilized to instruct the AccuLoad to load and validate the new
license information. Assuming a valid license is found and loaded, the new arms or
features should then be available for use.
Figure 93: Update License Diagnostics
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 61

3.1.3.22 Force Update Diagnostics
This diagnostic is intended to allow the AccuLoad to install or reinstall the most
recently uploaded firmware onto one or more of the satellite boards (A4M, A4B, A4I,
THMI) in the unlikely event that the normal automated upgrade process does not
complete successfully.
3.1.3.23 Serial Communications Monitor Diagnostics
The serial communications monitor is a monitoring feature of the serial traffic over
RS-232 or RS-485 connections. Key features of the monitor:
• Transmitted data is shown in the color Red

• Received data is shown in the color Blue
• The button labeled as Clear will clear the screen
• The button labeled as Pause will pause the data so it can be viewed
• Only live data is shown
• Past data not shown on the screen cannot be viewed
Figure 94: Serial Monitor

After navigating to the serial monitor from the diagnostics menu, any serial port that is
configured can be selected to be monitored as shown in the following screen capture.
Figure 95: Selecting a Serial Port
3.1.3.24 Connected Devices
The Connected Devices Menu shows which I/O boards (A4Ms, A4Bs, and A4Is) are
included and connected within the board set. Starting with AccuLoad IV version 1.0,
the I/O boards must be connected or paired in order to use the I/O. There are three
states that the I/O boards can be in on this screen:
Page 62 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

• Not Allocated―The I/O board is recognized by the system but is not paired.
• Connected―The I/O board is recognized by the system, is paired, and
communicating properly.
• Disconnected―The I/O board is paired to the system but is not communicating.
On the main Connected Devices screen, the system reset button will force a soft
restart of the system without requiring a full power cycle.
Each I/O board can be selected to view more information for that device. On the
Connected Devices screen, the board can be added (paired), deleted (unpaired),
replaced, or reset. Selecting reset will force a soft restart of that individual board with
out needing to cycle power.
3.1.3.25 Connected Devices Diagnostics
Starting with firmware version 1.0, the user has the ability to explicitly pair the
auxiliary I/O boards (A4M, A4B, A4I1, A4I2) with the main processor board (labeled
as BBB). AccuLoads that are shipped from the factory with version 1.0 or higher will
already have the I/O boards paired. However, AccuLoad IV units being upgraded
from a pre-1.0 revision to revision 1.0 or higher will require the boards to be manually
paired after the upgrade.
This same procedure will be required to replace an I/O board in the event one of the
auxiliary I/O boards needs to be replaced.
3.1.3.25.1 Adding (Pairing) I/O Boards:
1. Navigate to Main -> Diagnostics -> Connected Devices
• Devices that have not been paired will show as “Not Allocated”
• BBB will always show as “Connected”
• A4B, A4I1, A4I2 will only show for systems using those boards
2. Select the board to be added.
Figure 96: Adding (Pairing) I/O Boards, Step 2
3. When the information for the board is shown, select the “Add Device” button.

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 63
4. When the popup is shown to confirm the selection, select the “Submit” button.
5. The device will now show as “Connected”.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for all I/O boards in the system.
3.1.3.25.2 Replacing I/O Boards
If an A4M is replaced, the other A4B or A4I boards in the system will need to be
manually unpaired by setting S1-6 ON and resetting the board. After the board has
been reset, turn S1-6 OFF and pair the A4B and A4I boards to the newly connected
A4M.
If an I/O board needs to be replaced in the event of a failure, follow the steps below:
1. After the new board has been wired into the system and the AccuLoad has been
powered on, navigate to Main -> Diagnostics -> Connected Devices
2. Select the board that is being replaced. It will be listed as “Disconnected”:
Figure 100: Replacing I/O Boards, Step 2
3. Select the board that is replacing the one removed from the system.
4. Add the desired selected device in the same manner as in “Adding a new board”,
and confirm.
Page 64 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
Figure 101: Replacing I/O Boards, Step 3
3.1.3.25.3 Deleting I/O Boards
If an I/O board is removed from the system and no longer used, it should be unpaired
or “deleted”.
1. Navigate to Main -> Diagnostics -> Connected Devices.
2. Select the device to be unpaired (it may show as “disconnected”).
3. When the information for the board is shown, select the “Delete Device” button.
Figure 102: Deleting I/O Boards, Step 3
4. When the popup is shown to confirm the selection, select the “Submit” button.
Figure 103: Deleting I/O Boards, Step 4
3.1.3.25.4 Resetting the System (Soft Restart)
2. Select the “System Reset” button
Figure 104: Resetting the System (Soft Restart), Step 2

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 65
3. Confirm that the system should be restarted by selecting the “Continue”

button when prompted.
Figure 105: Resetting the System (Soft Restart), Step 3
3.1.3.25.5 Resetting Individual I/O Boards (Soft Restart)
2. Select the I/O board to be reset
3. When the information for the board is shown, select the “Reset Device”
button, as shown below:
Figure 106: Resetting Individual I/O Boards (Soft Restart), Step 3
4. Confirm that the board should be restarted by selecting the “Continue”

button when prompted.
Figure 107: Resetting Individual I/O Boards (Soft Restart), Step 4
Page 66 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Reports/Logs
4 Reports/Logs
By pressing Reports/Logs from the Main Menu, it is possible to generate printed

reports and view the AccuLoad’s historical data logs.
Figure 108: Report/Logs Main Menu

The Reports/Logs main menu consists of the following options:
• Summary
• Audit Trail
• Alarm History
• Transaction Log
• Event Log
• Prove Log
• Exit
4.1 Summary Reports
This selection allows for printing summary data of all throughput during a designated
period. Specify an arm, start, and end time/date to define the period to use for the
report, and press Print Report to generate the summary.
Figure 109: Summary Reports
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 67

4.2 Audit Trail
This selection provides a means to view the audit trail log and optionally print a sub
set of the entries in the log. All changes to parameters set to Access Level 4 or 5
are recorded in this log (see Section 2.2.9).
Figure 110: Audit Trail
4.3 Alarm History
Alarm History provides a means to view the alarm history.
Figure 111: Alarm History
4.4 Transaction Log
Transaction Log provides a means to view a list of the transactions that have been
completed and optionally view the details or print entries in the log as shown in the
following screens:
Figure 112: Transaction Log, Screen 1
Page 68 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 113: Transaction Log, Screen 2
4.4.1 Total Number of Stored Batches
The AccuLoad IV can store a maximum of 6000 batch records spread across a
variable number of transactions. Once this limit is reached, the oldest transaction
is deleted so that the latest transaction can be stored for reference purposes.
4.5 Event Log
Event Log provides a means to view and optionally print the event log. All events,
such as alarms, transaction start/end, and changes to parameters set to Access
Level 3 or below (see Section 2.9) are recorded in this log.
Figure 114: Event Log

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 69

4.6 Prove Log
The Prove Log provides a means to view the historic prove data, if the AccuLoad’s
‘Auto-Proving mechanism is used to generate linearization curves for the meters.

Figure 115: Prove Log, Screen 1



A list of the prove data for the arm as shown in the following screen. Prove details
can be viewed or printed from this diagnostic.

Figure 118: Prove Data

Page 70 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Weights and Measures/Calibration Menu
5 Weights and Measures/Calibration Menu
The features available within this section of the user-interface menu affect the
calibration information and metrologically significant data storage and are protected
by the weights and measures security requirements. The Level 5 access code (if
configured) will be required to perform these functions. Additionally, if the user has
programmed an input for a weights and measures security switch, it must be active.
See manual MN06201 for connection details for this optional switch.
Figure 119: Weights and Measures/Calibration Main Menu
The weights and measures/calibration main menu consists of the following options:
• Database (DB) Settings

• Set Transaction (Trans) Number (#)
• Erase Event Log
• Erase Transaction Log
• Meter Proving
• Metered Injector Proving
• Reset Totals
• Firmware Lock
• Exit
5.1 DB Settings (Database Settings)
From the database initialization screen, it is possible to reconfigure the database to

one of a list of possible desired starting points. Note that this option will reset all
previous program code configuration values in the database and return the AccuLoad
to one of a fixed set of initial states. Options include:
• Mix of straight and sequential arms

• Ratio blending (1 or 2 arms)
• Factory default
• Hybrid blending (1-3 arms)
The number of arms (1-6) and the desired system of units (US or SI) can also be
configured as part of the reconfiguration. Once these options are selected, select
Submit to reconfigure the database.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 71

Figure 120: Database Initialization

5.2 Set Trans # (Set Transaction Number)
The Set Trans # option allows the operator to specify what value the Transaction ID
for the next transaction run will be. This is to allow the operation to have continuous
transaction identifiers in the case of an upgrade or replacement of an existing preset.
Note that all existing transactions in the AccuLoad for the arm will be erased since
the prevention of duplicate transaction IDs cannot be guaranteed otherwise.
To change the starting transaction number, select the arm and enter the desired ID in
the text field, then select Continue.
Figure 121: Set Transaction Number

Press Continue once more to complete the process, or Cancel to return to the screen
and exit without changes.
5.3 Erase Event Log
This option erases all records in the Event Log:
Figure 122: Erase Event Log, Screen 1
Page 72 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

A confirmation dialog will appear:
Figure 123: Erase Event Log, Screen 2

If Continue is selected, all entries in the event log will be erased. In either case, after
a selection is made control returns to the weights and measure/calibration menu. This
activity will be logged in the audit trail.
5.4 Erase Transaction Log
This option erases all records in the Transaction Log:
Figure 124: Erase Transaction Log, Screen 1

A confirmation dialog will appear.
Figure 125: Erase Transaction Log, Screen 2
This activity will be logged in the Audit Trail.
5.5 Meter Proving
Follow the following steps to begin a proving operation from the weights and
measure/calibration menu:
Figure 126: Meter Proving, Step 1

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 73

1. Select Start Prove.
2. Enter the volumetric coefficient of expansion for the steel (typically can be found
on the nameplate of the prover).
3. Enter low flow start volume.

4. Enter the desired preset based on the can size and press Next.
Page 74 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

5. Start the prove run for a normal delivery.
At the end of the run, the data is presented allowing for multiple actions, including:

• Calculating the meter factor based on the prover neck reading and temperature
• Aborting the run and discarding the data associated with the run
• Accepting the run
• Starting a new run

6. Enter the volume in the prover can and the prover temperature reading, then
select Calculate to generate the new factor based on the run—This action may
take some time.

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 75

7. To accept the new meter factor, press Accept Last Run Meter Factor. To employ
additional runs, press Start Next Run. After multiple runs, the option to Accept
Avg Meter Factor can also be used. To see all the data associated with the prove
run, press the View button:
Figure 133: Meter Proving, Weights and Measures Menu

Once the prove operation is completed successfully and the appropriate meter factor
has been accepted, the AccuLoad will return to the weights and measures menu.
5.6 Metered Injector Proving
Proving of additive meters is required to ensure accurate additive injection through

metered injectors. To prove a metered injector, the flow out of the injector is collected
in a calibrated container while the injector is activated to deliver additive to fill the
container. Next, the amount delivered into the container is compared to the amount
indicated by the number of pulses counted by the AccuLoad and then a meter factor
is calculated.
The AccuLoad has built-in metered injector proving support which provides a simple
and efficient way to ensure the accuracy of metered injectors.
Figure 134: Metered Injector Proving, Description 1

A - Injector B - Single or
selection multiple injections
C - Injection
amount
D - Total
injection
amount
E - Start (multiple only)

The Process of proving an additive meter is as follows:
1. Arrange the plumbing out of the injector to flow into a graduated vessel.
2. Clear any active alarms.
3. Access the metered injector proving screen, shown above, from the main menu
(W&M/Calibration->Metered Injector Proving).
4. Select the injector to prove from the drop-down list (A in the figure above).
5. Select the option for a single or multiple injections:
• Single—The injections are manually controlled by the operator with one
injection of the amount entered in the amount of injection field each time the
operator presses the Inject button.
• Multiple—The AccuLoad automatically performs enough individual injections
of the amount entered in the amount of injection field to deliver the amount
entered in the total injection amount field.
Page 76 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
6. Enter the Amount of Injection (see diagram in Section 5.6).

7. Enter the Total Injection Amount if using the Multiple Injections method (see
above).
8. Press the Reset Pulse Counts to clear the proving data if starting a new prove.
9. Press Start to move to the next screen to where the additive flow is initiated. The
next screen will display the count of additive meter pulses and the amount of flow
represented by the pulses. For multiple injections, these totals will increment for
each injection.
10. If using the Single Injection method, press the Inject button the required
number of times required for the size of the proving vessel. If using the Multiple
Injection method, the AccuLoad will perform the selected number of injections
automatically.

Press to initiate flow Press when flow is

complete
11. Once the injection(s) are complete, press Next to move to the next screen to
enter the amount of additive indicated by the calibrated vessel.


Displays the Displays the current meter

raw data for the factor and once the Calculate
current prove button is pressed, the new
meter factor and % change
in meter factors

12. On the calculations screen, enter the Actual Delivered Amount as read from
the proving vessel and select the correct units for this amount, then press the
Calculate button. The AccuLoad will calculate the new meter factor and also
display the percentage change between the old meter factor and the new meter
factor.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 77

5.7 Reset Totals
From this menu selection, the totalizers in the AccuLoad can be reset. It is possible to
reset the totalizers for all arms at once, or for an individual load arm if desired.
Figure 137: Reset Totals

A confirmation dialog will appear. If continue is pressed, the totalizers for the selected
arm(s) will be cleared.
5.8 Firmware Lock
This option allows an installation to prevent certain features from being accessible
unless it is unlocked via a weights and measures-only accessible re-enable selection.
Disabled features include the ability to update the firmware, access to the factory
service port, and the ability to upload or download configuration files from AccuMate
(equations, configurable reports, etc.).
Figure 138: Firmware Lock
Page 78 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Device Settings
6 Device Settings
This menu provides options for configuring how the device operates, primarily
related to the user interface and display. Options are as shown and listed below:

Figure 139: Device Settings

• Screen Style
• NMI Settings
• Screen Test
6.1 Screen Style
This selection allows the user to configure the display style with the following options:
• Day style
• Night style
• Auto

Day style utilizes dark text and icons on a white background and is easier to read
in daylight. Night style utilizes a black background and is easier to view in darkness.
In auto, the AccuLoad will transition from day to night style based on a preset time
of 8:00 AM to 6:00 PM.
6.2 Man-Machine Interface (MMI) Settings
This selection redirects the interface to the local database server to allow modification
of the human-machine interface (HMI)/MMI settings. The following network settings are
default values for the HMI/MMI allowing network connection to an A4M with default
network settings:
Connections/Primary URL: http://10.0.0.1/?secret=HMI#

Network Settings/Static IP: 10.0.0.6
Network Settings/Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Network Settings/Gateway: 10.0.0.1
6.3 Screen Test
This diagnostic is designed to validate each pixel on the display. When pressed, the
entire screen will cycle from all black, to all red, to all green, to all blue, to all white.
This will repeat until the screen is pressed again to return to the menu.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 79

6.4 Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4 Models)
Follow the steps below to change the internal IP address for models ST, QT, and N4:
1. From the AccuLoad IV ready screen, press Main at the top left corner.
2. Navigate to the program mode -> system -> communications -> host interface.
Scroll to the bottom of the page where the parameters for Internal IP Address
and THMI IP Addresses are listed.
Figure 140: Changing the Internal IP Address (ST, QT, and N4 Models), Step 2
3. Change the parameters to the desired IP addresses and then press program
mode at the top of the screen.
Example: 192.168.1.1 and 192.168.1.6 respectively.
4. Once at the program mode menu, press save and exit. A Critical Errors screen
will appear. Choose Logout with warnings.
Page 80 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

5. Once this has been completed, you will be brought back to the Main Menu. Press
Device Settings.


6. Choose MMI Settings. The screen will turn white for a moment.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 81

7. Choose Configuration.
8. Enter the Level 4 pin. (Default: 4444)
9. Select Network Settings.
Page 82 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

The current IP address of the THMI and programmed gateway is displayed.
10. Change them to the desired new IP settings like the example below. Use the new
Accuload IV IP address as the Gateway. Once completed, press the green check
mark.
11. You will be returned to the Configuration screen. Press Connections.

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 83

12. Select Primary URL.
13. Change the Primary URL to reflect the new AccuLoad IV IP address preserving
all other content in the Primary URL.
14. Press the back arrow in the top right corner of the screen to ensure all settings
have saved.
15. Once these steps are completed, power down the entire AccuLoad IV for one
minute and re-apply power. The new IP settings should take effect.
6.5. Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)
1. Determine all of the IP addresses to be used for the system.
• A unique internal IP address will be needed for each board set in the system.
• A unique THMI IP address will be needed for the board set connected to the
MMI A.
• A unique THMI B IP address will be needed for the board set connected to
MMI B (if applicable).
• The same class of IP address must be used for each parameter.
Example—This example assumes a three board set system (SAA, SAB, and
SAC) with two MMIs.
a. Board set SAA

• Internal address—192.168.0.2
• THMI IP address—192.168.0.6
• THMI B IP address—0.0.0.0 (the MMI is not connected to board set
SAA)
b. Board set SAB

• Internal IP address—192.168.0.3
• THMI IP address—0.0.0.0 (the MMI is not connected to board set
SAB)
• THMI B IP address—0.0.0.0 (the MMI is not connected to board set
SAB)
Page 84 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

c. Board set SAC

• Internal IP address—192.168.0.4
• THMI IP address—0.0.0.0 (the MMI is not connected to board set
SAC)
• THMI B IP address—192.168.0.7
2. From the Run Ready Screen, select the Main button, then select the desired
board set from the Board Selector popup.
3. Navigate to Program Mode -> System -> Communications -> Host Interface and
scroll to the bottom of the list.
4. Change the following parameters’ IP addresses to the addresses listed below.
• Parameters 1720 internal IP address

• Parameter 1721 THMI IP address (if MMI A is connected to the board set)
• Parameter 1722 THMI B IP address (if MMI B is connected to the board set)
from the default values to the values determined in Step 1.

See the following board set examples:
a. Board set SAA (listed below and shown in graphic):

• Internal IP Address—192.168.0.2
• THMI IP Address—192.168.0.6
• THMI B IP Address—0.0.0.0
Figure 152: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board Set SAA
b. Board set SAB (listed below and shown in graphic):

Figure 153: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board Set SAB
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 85

c. Board set SAC (listed below and shown in graphic):


Figure 154: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board Set SAC
5. While still in Program Mode, navigate to Split Architecture -> Board Addresses.
6. Update the following parameters with the internal IP addresses from the other
board sets in the system:
• Parameter 1611 Board Set 2

See the following board set examples:

a. Board set SAA (listed below and shown in graphic):
• Board Set 2—192.168.0.3
• Board Set 3—192.168.0.4
• Board Set 4—0.0.0.0
Figure 155: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board Set SAA
b. Board set SAB (listed below and shown in graphic):

• Board Set 2—192.168.0.2
• Board Set 3—192.168.0.4
• Board Set 4—0.0.0.0
Figure 156: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board Set SAB
Page 86 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

c. Board Set SAC (listed below and shown in graphic):

• Board Set 2—192.168.0.2
• Board Set 3—192.168.0.3
• Board Set 4—0.0.0.0
Figure 157: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Board Set SAC

7. Exit Program Mode and save changes.
8. Using the MMI(s), navigate to the Main Menu on the board set connected to the
MMI. From there, navigate to Device Settings -> MMI Settings.
9. Once the MMI menu is shown, select Configuration and Login.
• Default pin: 4444
10. Navigate to Network Settings.
11. Update the IP Address to use the THMI IP address or the THMI B IP address
entered on Board Sets that are connected to the MMIs. Save changes.
See the following board set examples and update IP address, Netmask, and
Gateway:
a. MMI A
• IP Address—192.168.0.6
• Netmask—255.255.0.0
• Gateway—192.0.0.1
Figure 158: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Network Settings
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 87

b. MMI B
• IP Address—192.168.0.7
• Netmask—255.255.0.0
• Gateway—192.0.0.1
Figure 159: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Network Settings 2
12. Navigate to the Connections settings.
13. Select Primary URL.
14. Update the URL to use the internal IP address to the Board Set connected to the
MMI.
Examples:
a. MMI A (either URL is valid):

• http://192.168.0.2/?secret=HMI
• http://192.168.0.2/bay=A/?secret=HMI

Figure 160: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Primary URL
b. MMI B:
• http://192.168.0.4/bay=B/?secret=HMI
Page 88 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 161: Changing the Internal IP Address (SA Model)—Primary URL
15. Return to the Main Menu for the MMI.
16. The AccuLoad must be restarted for all of the changes to take affect.
6.6 Touch Screen Recalibration Procedures
6.6.1 Equipment and Other Requirements
A nylon stylus MFG: FTDI PN: VA-FC-STYLUS1 or equivalent should be used on the
screen.
WARNING: Do not use a pen, screwdriver or any other sharp object as this may
damage or destroy the screen.
6.6.2 Accessing the Display Module Menu Through the AccuLoad IV Menu
The following steps describe how to access the display module menu:
Figure 162: Display Module Menu
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 89

1. From the Run/Ready Mode screen, go to the Main menu.
Figure 163: Main Menu, Device Settings
2. Select the Device Settings menu.
3. If firmware is revision 0.10 or higher, there will be a Touchscreen Calibration

button on this menu. Select that button to begin the process.
Figure 164: Main Menu, Device Settings, Touchscreen Calibration
4. For firmware older than 0.10, select the MMI Settings button and wait for the
Display Module menu to appear. If the menu does not appear after a short time,
you may have to restart the Display Module as follows:
a. Power down the AccuLoad IV unit.
b. Remove the front cover bolts and open the unit.
c. Remove the Ethernet cable that connects the THMI to the A4M board.
d. Re-apply power to the unit. While the THMI is booting, a gear icon will display
momentarily.
e. Press the gears button to access the Display Module Main menu.
f. Proceed to the Recalibration procedure below.
Page 90 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

6.6.3 Display Module Touchscreen Recalibration Procedure
Follow these steps to recalibrate the display module touchscreen:
1. Select Touchscreen Calibration from the Maintenance menu.

Figure 165: Maintenance Menu

Figure 166: Touchscreen Calibration from Maintenance Menu
2. Log in at Security Level 4 using the 4-digit pin 4444. Upon successful login, the
calibration utility will appear.
Figure 167: Log in at Security Level 4

Figure 168: TSLIB Test Program

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 91

3. Calibrate by touching the cursor with the stylus in each of the five
positions when prompted. If this fails, restart calibration utility then
launch the low-level calibration by firmly pressing the same location
on the TSLIB calibration utility screen five times.
Figure 169: Action Timed Out

A red bar will be displayed on the LCD.
Figure 170: Red Bar on LCD
4. Using an approved stylus (nylon stylus MFG: FTDI PN: VA-FC-STYLUS1 or

equivalent) tap the screen moving across the red bar from one corner of
the display to the other (try to keep as close to the edge of the LCD as
possible).
Once enough touch points are received, the red bar will be displayed
on a new edge. Once all 4 sides have been calibrated, the process is
complete.
6.6.4 Alternate Methods to Initiate a Calibration (If Touchscreen Is Unresponsive)
1. Try to initiate calibration using a remote browser.
2. Issue a TC_cal communications command via Smith host protocol.
3. Trigger calibration via internal DIP Switch.
Page 92 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Device Information
7 Device Information
Device Information provides details about the AccuLoad IV firmware and software as
shown in the following screen:
Figure 171: Device Information

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 93

Page intentionally left blank.
Page 94 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Program Mode Reference
8 Program Mode Reference
This section describes the individual program codes within the directories. The
directories and subdirectories are listed above each set of parameters. Please note
that the numbers in parentheses are reference numbers for communications. In the
database, pick list items have a reference number for communications, for example,
(2). Through communications, a 2 would be sent to the AccuLoad to select that
option for the parameter.
The program code explanations frequently list fatal or critical warnings, or indicate
that in some circumstances, the code is no entry. A fatal warning is triggered by a
selection that the AccuLoad cannot accept and will not allow to be entered. Possible
causes include an entry that falls outside an allowable range or an entry that
seriously conflicts with a previous entry. A critical warning signals that a selection
is incompatible with a previously configured program code. The AccuLoad will accept
the new entry, but the conflict will have to be resolved prior to operation. No entry
indicates that a program code is unavailable and will not appear on the menu,
because previous selections make it irrelevant. For example, ratio blending program
codes will not appear when sequential blending has been chosen.
The main system directories are as follows:
Configuration (Config) Directories Meter Directories

(Located in the Load Arm directory)
000—System Layout
200—Flow Control
100—Pulse Inputs
300—Volume Accuracy
200—Pulse Outputs
400—Temperature/Density
300—Digital Inputs
500—Pressure
500—Digital Outputs
900—Analog I/O Product Directories
(Located in the Load Arm directory)
System Directories
100—General Purpose
200—Flow Control
200—Flow Control
500—Pressure
500—Pressure
600—Alarm Configuration Recipe Directories
700—Communications Product Blend
800—Additive Recipe Additives
Security Split Architecture Directories
Bay Directories
700—Communications
Arms Directories
200—Flow Control
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 95

8.1. Configuration Directories
8.1.1 System Layout Directory

000—System Layout Directory includes:
• Number of Load Arms
• Arm 1 - 6 Configuration
• Arm 1 - 6 Number of Products
• Arm 1 - 6 Ratio Products
• A4B Available
• A4I Available
• Board Set Number
• Board Set Function
Configuration:System Layout:Num- Index: None Range: 1 - 6

ber of Load Arms • AccuLoad ST―1 or 2
• AccuLoad QT―6 maximum
Configuration—001
Description: This parameter defines the number of load arms associated with this AccuLoad.
Critical(s):
• Insufficient meter pulse inputs―A4B required
• Configuration requires more meters than are available.
Fatal: Entry is out of specified range.
Configuration:System Layout:Arm Index: Arm Range: None

Default: Straight Product
Configuration—See table below
Description: These parameters determine the functionality of Arms 1 - 6 respectively.
Selection:
• [(0) Straight Product Arm]
• (1) Sequential Blending Arm
• (2) Ratio Blending Arm
• (3) Side-Stream Blender
• (4) Unloading
• (5) Hybrid Blending
• (6) Straight with VRS
Critical(s):
Unloading requires inputs DE Head High Flow, Low Flow, and Stop.
Configuration:System Layout:Arm Index: Arm Range: 1 - 6

Number of Products Default: 1

Description: This parameter defines the number of products assigned to the arm. Valid entries are 1 - 6.
Critical(s):
• Straight-product configuration requires single product.
• Ratio-blending configuration requires more than one product.
• Block valves required for all products (sequential blending configuration).
• Configuration requires more meters than are available.
• Number of products must be two when side-stream blending.
• Ratio blending limited to two products.
• Straight with VRS requires this parameter to be programmed to 2.
Page 96 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Configuration:System Layout:Arm Index: Arm Range: 1 - 6

Number of Ratio Products
Hybrid-Type Blending Arms Only

Description: The parameter specifies the number of products on a hybrid load arm that do not share a meter. Product runs
with separate metering, whether upstream or downstream of a shared meter, are considered ratio products. Each ratio
product for the hybrid arm requires a digital or analog valve for flow control. Each sequential product requires a block valve
unless there is only one sequential product. This parameter does not require an entry if the loading arm is not programmed
as a hybrid loading arm.
Critical(s):
• Control valves required for all hybrid arm ratio products.
• Block valves required for all hybrid arm sequential products (if more than one sequential product).
• Entry for the ratio products must be less than arm number of products.
System Layout Arm Configuration Arm Number of Products Arm Number of Ratio Products
Arm 1 004 003 014
Arm 2 004 005 015
Arm 3 006 007 016
Arm 4 008 009 017
Arm 5 010 011 018
Arm 6 012 013 019
Configuration:System Layout:A4B Index: None Range: Yes/No

Available
Configuration—1000
Description: This parameter should be set to No for the AccuLoad ST and N4 models which do not have an A4B module. It
should be set to Yes for the AccuLoad QT and SA models which have the A4B module.
Selections:
• No―for the AccuLoad ST and N4 models which do not have an A4B module.
• Yes―for the AccuLoad QT and SA models which have the A4B module.
Help: Enter No for ST and N4 models, enter Yes for QT and SA models.
Configuration:System Layout:A4I Index: None Range:

Available • None
• One A4I board
Configuration—1001 • Two A4I boards
Description: This parameter must be set to indicate the number of optional A4I modules installed in the unit.
Selections:
• No (None)
• One board
• Two boards
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 97

Configuration:System Layout:Board Index: None Range: 0 - 99

Set Number
Split Architecture Only
Description: This parameter must be set to the number of board sets in the system.
Configuration:System Layout:Board Index: None Range:

Set Function
Description: Select if this AccuLoad board set is standalone or part of a Split Architecture configuration.
Selections:
• No Split Arch―Used for the ST, QT, and N4 models
• No HMI―Used for a board set in split architecture that does not have an MMI connected to it
• HMI A―Used for a board set in split architecture that has MMI A connected to it
• HMI B―Used for a board set in split architecture that has MMI B connected to it
• Dual HMI―Used for a single board set with two MMIs
Help: See Section 8.8―Split Architecture Directories―for additional split architecture parameters.
8.1.2 Pulse Inputs Directory
100—Pulse Inputs Configuration Directory includes:

• Pulse Input Tag
• Pulse Input Function
• Pulse Input Arm
• Pulse Input Meter
The AccuLoad ST and N4 models have a total of 8 pulse inputs available for use.
The AccuLoad QT model supports up to 14 pulse inputs. The AccuLoad automatically
assigns pulse inputs for the product meters. Only pulse inputs not required for the
product meters are user configurable. Because the AccuLoad must have at least one
product meter input, at a minimum pulse inputs 1 and 2 are reserved for connection
to a product meter.
Pulse Inputs 3 - 14
Configurable Pulse Input parameters include Tag. Function, Pulse Input Arm, Pulse
Input Meter.
This section describes the parameters which are used to configure the pulse inputs.
Configuration:Pulse Inputs:Pulse Index: Pulse Input Range: 10 characters max.

Input Tag

Description: The tag will be used as the label for this pulse input. The default tag describes the connection terminals
associated with this pulse input.
Page 98 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Configuration:Pulse Inputs:Pulse Index: Pulse Input Range:

Input Function

Description: This parameter defines the purpose of this pulse input.
Selections:
• NA
• Freq Densitometer
• Meter Inj 1 - 4
• Flow Cntrl Inj 1 - 4
Critical(s):
• Input assignments must be unique.
• Injector I/O assignment does not match type.
• No digital output assigned for this injector.
• This input cannot be a frequency densitometer.
• Pulse input already allocated for meter pulses.
• Insufficient configurable pulse inputs [no A4B].
• Only one densitometer allowed per arm/meter.
Configuration:Pulse Inputs:Pulse Index: Pulse Input Range: 1 - 6

Input Arm

Description: This parameter identifies which arm the pulse input is associated with. For example, if a pulse input is
designated as a metered injector, this parameter will define which arm the metered injector is associated.
Critical(s):
• Load arm not configured.
Configuration:Pulse Inputs:Pulse Index: Pulse Input Range: 1 - 6

Input Meter

Description: Pulse input 1 - 14 can be assigned to one of the following meters.
Selection:
• Meter 1
• Meter 2
• Meter 3
• Meter 4
• Meter 5
• Meter 6
Critical(s):
• Meter not configured.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 99

Pulse Input *Pulse Input Tag *Pulse Input Function *Pulse Input Arm *Pulse Input Meter
1 1100 1101 1102 1103
2 1104 1105 1106 1107
3 1108 103 104 105
4 1109 107 108 109
5 1110 111 112 113
6 1111 115 116 117
7 1112 119 120 121
8 1113 123 124 125
9 1114 127 128 129
10 1115 131 132 133
11 1116 135 136 137
12 1117 139 140 141
13 1118 1119 1120 1121
14 1122 1123 1124 1125
*Shaded areas = New to AccuLoad IV
8.1.3 200—Pulse Outputs Directory
Pulse Outputs 1 - 5
Pulse Outputs Configuration Directory includes:

• Pulse Output Tag
• Pulse Output Arm
• Pulse Output Meter
• Pulse Output Pulses/Amount
• Pulse Output Units
• Pulse Output Maximum Frequency
Configuration:Pulse Outputs:Pulse Index: Range: 10 character

Output Tag

Description: This parameter defines the tag associated with this pulse output used on diagnostic screens.
The default tag is the terminal connections associated with this pulse output (ie A4M TBK4:7,8)
Page 100 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Configuration:Pulse Outputs:Pulse Index: Range: 1 - 6

Output Arm

Description: This program code sets which arm this output represents. The output will be active when flow is active during
a batch, and represents volume. The number of pulses is determined by Configuration 203 – Pulse/Volume, and volume
type is determined by Configuration 204 – Pulse Out Units.
Selections:
• Not used
• Arm 1 Pulses
• Arm 2 Pulses
• Arm 3 Pulses
• Arm 4 Pulses
• Arm 5 Pulses
• Arm 6 Pulses
Critical(s):
Configuration:Pulse Output:Pulse Index: Range: 0 - 6

Output Meter

Description: This parameter defines the meter associated with this pulse output.
Selections:
• Combined Meters (Ratio Blending Only)
• Meter 1 Pulses
• Meter 2 Pulses
• Meter 3 Pulses
• Meter 4 Pulses
• Meter 5 Pulses
• Meter 6 Pulses
Configuration:Pulse Output:Pulse Index: Range: 0.00 - 999.99

Output Pulse/Amount

Description: This five-digit parameter defines the pulse output resolution, the number of pulses per unit of volume to be
generated (e.g., 0.1 will output 1 pulse for every 10 units of volume).
Configuration:Pulse Output:Pulse Index: Pulse Output Range: 1 - 5

Output Pulse Units

Description: This parameter defines the volume type used to pace the pulse output.
Selections:
• IV [Indicated Volume or Raw]
• GV [Gross]
• GST [Gross Standard Temperature]
• GSV [Gross at Standard Temperature and Pressure]
• Mass
Critical:
• Selected units not available.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 101
Configuration:Pulse Output:Pulse Index: Pulse Output Range: 0 - 3500 Hz.

Output Maximum Frequency

Description: This four-digit entry limits the pulse output frequency for Pulse Output #1 to a fixed range (0 to 3500 Hz) to
avoid over-speeding the device attached to the pulse output. All of the intended pulses will eventually be transmitted; the
total period will be increased if required to ensure the correct number of pulses is output. A 0 entry disables this feature.
Fatal:
• Entry is out of specified range.
Pulse *Pulse OP Pulse OP Pulse OP Pulse OP Pulse OP Pulse OP

Output Tag Arm Meter Pulse/Amount Pulse Units Max. Freq.
OP 1 1200 201 202 203 204 205
OP 2 1201 206 207 208 209 210
OP 3 1202 211 212 213 214 215
OP 4 1203 216 217 218 219 220
OP 5 1204 221 222 223 224 225
8.1.4 300—DC & AC Digital Input Function Directories

Refer to the Installation Manual MN06201 for Terminal Assignments.
Digital Inputs 1 - 43
Digital Inputs Configuration Directory includes:

• Digital Input Tag
• Digital Input Function
• Digital Input Arm
• Digital Input Product
The availability of the digital inputs depends on the hardware being used in the
AccuLoad. The inputs available are as follows:
Hardware Inputs Available

ALIV-ST Digital Input 1 – Digital Input #11 (6-DC and 5-AC)
ALIV-QT Digital Input 1 – Digital Input #23 (14-DC and 9-AC)
Digital Inputs #16-23 are Bi-State I/O points located on the A4B. If a Digital Input function is selected for one
of these I/O points and the corresponding Digital Output (ranging between numbers 31-38) has already
been configured, the I/O point cannot be used as a Digital Input.
A4I (Opt.) Digital Input #24 – Digital Input #33 (10-DC)
Available as an option on both the ALIV-ST and ALIV-QT hardware.
A4I2 (Opt.) Digital Input #34 – Digital Input #43 (10-DC)
Available as an option on the ALIV-QT hardware.
The AccuLoad also allows unused channels on installed A4I board(s) to be used for general-purpose I/O. One
input is available for each A4I channel not being used for Add-Pak injector control. The A4I set to address 100 is
mapped to Digital Inputs #24-33 and a 2nd A4I at address 200 would be mapped to Digital Inputs #34-43.
Page 102 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Example – If 1 A4I is installed and 6 Add-Pak injectors are programmed for use, 4 channels on the A4I are avail-
able for use as general purpose inputs. If additives 5,6,7,8,9 and 10 10 (corresponding to A4I channels 1-6) are
programmed for Add-Pak injectors then channels 7-10 on the A4I (Digital Inputs #30-#33) could be used for other
features.
These program codes define the function for a digital input. Except for general purpose inputs, duplicate assign-
ments are not allowed. Inputs 1 through 6 are DC inputs, and 7 through 15 are AC. Selections are as follows:
Configuration:Pulse Inputs:Digital Index: Range: 10 character

Input Tag

Description: This parameter defines the tag associated with this digital input used on diagnostic screens.
The default tag is the terminal connections associated with this digital input (ie A4M TBK4:1,2)
Configurations:Digital Inputs:DC & Index: Range: 1 - 43

AC Digital Input Function

Description: Assign a function to one of the digital inputs. Inputs 7 - 15 are AC; all others are DC.
Selections:
• Not used
• Security 1 - 2
• Permissive 1 - 2
• First/Second High Flow
• Remote Start
• Remote Stop
• Remote Stop Arm
• Transaction Reset
• General Purpose Input
• Printer Tray Switch
• Block Valve Feedback
• Piston Injector 1 – 24 Feedback
• System Permissive 1 - 3
• Swing Arm – Side A and Side B
• DE Head Stop Flow [not available if no unloading arms]
• DE Head Low Flow [not available if no unloading arms]
• DE Head High Flow [not available if no unloading arms]
• Bay A Permissive 1 and 2 [not available if Bays not assigned]
• Bay B Permissive 1 and 2 [not available if Bays not assigned]
• Metered Injector Prove Remote
• Recipe Select 1 – 3
Criticals:
• Must be at highest level of security [to program or de-program security inputs]
• Input assignments must be unique [except general purpose inputs; block valve feedback (check arm and product);
permissive #1 (check arm); permissive #2 (check arm)]
• Injector I/O assignment does not match type [injector feedbacks only]
• No digital output assigned for this injector [injector feedbacks only]
• Block valves used with sequential blending only
• A4B required for this digital I/O point.
• This I/O currently configured as an Add-Pak injector. [Inputs 24 – 43 only]
Notes:
• Additive injector selections available dependent on Configuration Code 020. (Only 12 are available with AccuLoad IV-S
hardware.)
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 103

Configuration:Digital Inputs:Digital Index: Digital Input Range: 1 - 6

Input Arm

Description: Some digital input functions are specific to an arm which is selected by this parameter.
Selections:
• Arm 1 – Arm 6
Critical(s):
• No DE Head High Flow, Low Flow, Stop Inputs on this arm.
Notes:
• Some digital input functions are system-based and the arm entry is not used, and will not appear on the AccuLoad
Program Mode menus in these cases. These functions include security inputs, general purpose inputs, remote stop
(master), and piston injector feedback inputs.
Configuration: Digital Inputs: Digital Index: Digital Input Range: 1 - 6

Input Product

Description: Assign a product to one of the digital input functions from the list above.
Selections:
• Product 1 – Product 6
These entries can only be configured for a Sequential Blending arm.
Critical(s):
• Only one block valve feedback per product.
• Product not configured.
Digital Inputs *Input Tag Input Function Input Arm Input Product
1 1300 301 302 304
2 1301 305 306 308
3 1302 309 310 312
4 1303 313 314 316
5 1304 317 318 320
6 1305 321 322 324
7 1306 325 326 328
8 1307 329 330 332
9 1308 333 334 336
10 1309 337 338 340
11 1310 341 342 344
12 1311 345 346 348
13 1312 349 350 352
14 1313 353 354 356
15 1314 357 358 360
16 1315 361 362 364
17 1316 365 366 368
18 1317 369 370 372
19 1318 373 374 376
20 1319 377 378 380
21 1320 381 382 384
22 1321 385 386 388
23 1322 389 390 392
24 1323 393 394 396
25 1324 397 398 400
26 1325 401 402 404
27 1326 405 406 408
28 1327 409 410 412
Page 104 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
Digital Inputs *Input Tag Input Function Input Arm Input Product
29 1328 413 414 416
30 1329 417 418 420
31 1330 421 422 424
32 1331 425 426 428
33 1332 429 430 432
34 1333 433 434 436
35 1334 437 438 440
36 1335 441 442 444
37 1336 445 446 448
38 1337 449 450 452
39 1338 453 454 456
40 1339 457 458 460
41 1340 461 462 464
42 1341 465 466 468
43 1342 469 470 472
8.1.5 500—DC & AC Digital Output Function Directories
Refer to the Installation Manual MN06201 for Terminal Assignments.
These program code define the functionality of the digital outputs. Except for
General Purpose outputs, duplicate assignments are not allowed for the same
arm (or meter or product). If a digital valve is being configured, both upstream and
downstream solenoids must be assigned. Outputs 1-3 are DC (located on the A4M
board). Outputs 4-30 are AC.
The Bi-State Expansion (A4B) hardware, provides 8 additional DC channels mapped

to outputs 31-38.
The AccuLoad also allows unused channels on installed A4I (Add-Pak) board(s) to be
used for general-purpose I/O. Two digital outputs are available for each A4I channel
not being used for Add-Pak injector control. The A4I set to address 100 maps to
Digital Output #39-58.
Example – If 1 A4I is installed and 6 Add-Pak injectors are programmed for use,
8 channels on the A4I are available for use as general purpose outputs. If additives
5,6,7,8,9 and 10 are programmed for Add-Pak injectors (corresponding to A4I
channels 1-6) then A4I channels 7-10 are available for General Purpose I/O.
You could then assign Digital Outputs #51-58 (which map to those A4I channels)
to the desired functions. If a second A4I is installed, the outputs map to Digital
Output #59-78.
Note: If the A4I I/O is controlled via serial communications; it is recommended that it
not be used for any time-sensitive function. Do NOT use these outputs for control
valve or injector solenoids. Response should be satisfactory for pump outputs and
block valve control.
The number of additive pumps, piston injectors, and metered injectors is dependent
on Configuration Code 020 and shared additives and on the hardware. (AccuLoad
hardware allows for 24.) The number of metered injectors depends on the number
of load arms selected and choices for dual pulse and transmitter integrity. (See
Installation Manual MN06201 for pulse input table, manual.)
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 105

Note: For selection (97) Vapor Line Valve, this is available for Straight with VRS
arm type. If configured, the AccuLoad will open the vapor line valve when the main
product valve is open and close the vapor line valve when the main product valve is
closed.
Configuration:Digital Outputs:Digital Index: Range: 10 character

Output Tag

Description: This parameter defines the tag associated with this digital input used on diagnostic screens.
The default tag is the terminal connections associated with this digital input (ie A4M TBK5:1,2)
Configurations:Digital Outputs:DC & Index: Range: 1 - 78

AC Digital Output Function

Selections:
• Not used
• Pump
• Upstream Solenoid
• Downstream Solenoid
• Alarm Relay 1 – 2
• General Purpose Output
• Block Valve [not selectable if no sequential blending]
• Stop Relay
• Additive Pump 1 – 24
• Piston Injector 1 – 24
• Metered Injector 1 – 4
• Shared Additive 1 – 24 Solenoid
• Shared System Flush 1 – 4
• Flow Controlled Injector 1 – 4 Upstream Solenoid
• Flow Controlled Injector 1 – 4 Downstream Solenoid
• Vapor Line Valve
Criticals:
• Output assignments must be unique [except for general purpose function, block valve, up and downstream solenoids, and
pump in multi-arm/multi-meter modes]
• Metered injector pulse input not configured
• Both upstream and downstream solenoids required
• Injector I/O assignment does not match type
• Too many additive pumps defined
• Too many additive injectors defined
• Block valves used with sequential blending only
• This I/O point is configured for Add-Pak Injector
• Smart Injector communications must be configured to use Add-Pak I/O
• Upstream/Downstream Solenoid function not supported on Add-Pak hardware
• Digital valve solenoids not supported on A4I hardware
• Smart Inject comm port required for A4I I/O
• Upstream and downstream solenoids not available for vapor recovery line
• Pump not available for Vapor Recovery Line
Page 106 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Configuration:Digital Outputs:DC & Index: Digital Output Range: 1 - 6 (depending on model)

AC Digital Output Arm

Description: This entry defines the arm associated with the digital output function.
Selections:
• Arm 1 – Arm 6
Critical: Load Arm not configured.
Configuration:Digital Outputs:DC & Index: Digital Output Range: DC 1 - 3, AC 4 - 78

AC Digital Output Meter

Description: This entry defines the arm associated with the digital output function.
Selections:
• Meter 1 – Meter 6
This entry is only valid for a Ratio Blending arm. (In other configurations, only Meter 1 exists for the arm; hence, the arm
entry determines which meter is intended.)
Critical(s): Meter not configured.
Configuration:Digital Outputs:DC & Index: Digital Output Range: DC 1 - 3, AC 4 - 78

AC Digital Output Product

Description: Assign a product to one of the digital output functions from the list above.
Selections:
• Product 1 – Product 6
These entries are used only if the entry for the related Digital Output Function is “Block Valve Feed-back."
Critical: Product not configured.
Digital Output *Output Tag Output function Output Arm Output meter Output product
1 1500 501 502 503 504
2 1501 505 506 507 508
3 1502 509 510 511 512
4 1503 513 514 515 516
5 1504 517 518 519 520
6 1505 521 522 523 524
7 1506 525 526 527 528
8 1507 529 530 531 532
9 1508 533 534 535 536
10 1509 537 538 539 540
11 1510 541 542 543 544
12 1511 545 546 547 548
13 1512 549 550 551 552
14 1513 553 554 555 556
15 1514 557 558 559 560
16 1515 561 562 563 564
17 1516 565 566 567 568
18 1517 569 570 571 572
19 1518 573 574 575 576
20 1519 577 578 579 580
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 107

Digital Output *Output Tag Output function Output Arm Output meter Output product
21 1520 581 582 583 584
22 1521 585 586 587 588
23 1522 589 590 591 592
24 1523 593 594 595 596
25 1524 597 598 599 600
26 1525 601 602 603 604
27 1526 605 606 607 608
28 1527 609 610 611 612
29 1528 613 614 615 616
30 1529 617 618 619 620
31 1530 621 622 623 624
32 1531 625 626 627 628
33 1532 629 630 631 632
34 1533 633 634 635 636
35 1534 637 638 639 640
36 1535 641 642 643 644
37 1536 645 646 647 648
38 1537 649 650 651 652
39 1538 653 654 655 656
40 1539 657 658 659 660
41 1540 661 662 663 664
42 1541 665 666 667 668
43 1542 669 670 671 672
44 1543 673 674 675 676
45 1544 677 678 679 680
46 1545 681 682 683 684
47 1546 685 686 687 688
48 1547 689 690 691 692
49 1548 693 694 695 696
50 1549 697 698 699 700
51 1550 701 702 703 704
52 1551 705 706 707 708
53 1552 709 710 711 712
54 1553 713 714 715 716
55 1554 717 718 719 720
56 1555 721 722 723 724
57 1556 725 726 727 728
58 1557 729 730 731 732
59 1558 733 734 735 736
60 1559 737 738 739 740
61 1560 741 742 743 744
62 1561 745 746 747 748
63 1562 749 750 751 752
64 1563 753 754 755 756
65 1564 757 758 759 760
66 1565 761 762 763 764
67 1566 765 766 767 768
68 1567 769 770 771 772
69 1568 773 774 775 776
70 1569 777 778 779 780
71 1570 781 782 783 784
72 1571 785 786 787 788
73 1572 789 790 791 792
74 1573 793 794 795 796
75 1574 797 798 799 800
76 1575 801 802 803 804
77 1576 805 806 807 808
78 1577 809 810 811 812
*Shaded areas are new to AccuLoad IV.
Page 108 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.1.6 900—Analog I/O Directories
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog Index: Analog I/O Range: 10 character

I/O Tag

Description: This entry defines the arm associated with the Analog I/O point. This entry is only valid for a Ratio Blending
arm. (In other configurations, only Meter 1 exists for the arm; hence, the arm entry determines which meter is intended.) ie
TP1001
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog I/O Index: Analog I/O Range: 1 - 6

Function

Description: These program codes define the function of the analog inputs.
Selections:
• Not Used
• Temperature Input
• Density Input
• Pressure Input
• Analog Valve
• Flow Rate Output
• General Purpose Output
• Injector 1 – 4 Analog Valve
• Injector 1 – 4 Temperature Input
• General Purpose Input
Critical(s):
• RTDs can only be temperature inputs
• I/O assignments must be unique (per load arm or meter)
• Function and type must both be input or output
• Only one densitometer allowed per arm/ meter
• This injector is not configured as a flow controlled injector
• Duplicate assignments are not allowed
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog Index: Analog I/O Range: 1 - 6

I/O Arm

Description: This entry defines the arm associated with the Analog I/O point. This entry is only valid for a Ratio Blending
arm. (In other configurations, only Meter 1 exists for the arm; hence, the arm entry determines which meter is intended.)
Selections:
• Arm 1 - 6
Critical: Load arm not configured.
Note: The AccuLoad leaves the factory with default values programmed for Cal 1 and Cal 2 counts for the six
analog I/O points, to achieve the highest possible accuracy, it is a user requirement to program the calibration
numbers marked on the individual modules.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 109

Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog I/O Index: Analog I/O Range: 1 - 6

Meter

Description: This entry defines the meter associated with the Analog I/O point.
Selections:
• Meter 1 - 6
Criticals:
• Meter not configured.
• Meter must be set to 1 when this input is assigned to a side-stream blending arm.
• Density cannot be configured for the vapor recovery meter.
• Analog valve not available for vapor recovery line.
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog I/O Index: Selections:

Type Analog I/O • Analog I/O #1: A4M TB5:1(RTD+), 2(SIG+), 3(SIG-), 4(RTD-)
• Analog I/O #2: A4M TB5:5(RTD+), 6(SIG+), 7(SIG-), 8(RTD-)
Configuration—See table below • Analog I/O #3: A4M TB5:9(RTD+), 10(SIG+), 11(SIG-), 12(RTD-)
Description: These program codes define the type of analog module used.
Selections:
• Not Used
• 4-20 mA Input
• 1-5 Vdc Input
• RTD
• 4-20 mA Output
• 1-5 Vdc Output
Criticals:
• RTDs can only be temperature inputs.
• Function and type must both be input or output.
• Analog type must be programmed.
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog I/O Index: Analog I/O Range: 0 - [12288] - 65535

Calibration 1 Counts

Description: These five-digit program codes are used to calibrate the analog input module. Calibration factors can be found
on the top label of the input modules. Calibration 1 counts must be less than Calibration 2 counts. When these values are
assigned based on the values from the label on the Analog Input/Output Modules, maximum accuracy will be attained.
Critical: Cal1 must be less than Cal2
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog I/O Index: Analog I/O Range: 0 - [53248] - 65535

Calibration 2 Counts

Description: These five-digit program codes are used to calibrate the analog input module. Calibration factors can be found
on the top label of the input modules. Calibration 2 counts must be greater than Calibration 1 counts. When these values are
assigned based on the values from the label on the Analog Input/Output Modules, maximum accuracy will be attained.
Critical: Cal1 must be less than Cal2
Note: The AccuLoad leaves the factory with default values programmed for Cal 1 and Cal 2 counts for the six
analog I/O points, to achieve the highest possible accuracy, it is a user requirement to program the calibration
numbers marked on the individual modules.
Page 110 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog I/O Index: Analog I/O Range: -999.99 - [0.00] - 9999.99
Low Value

Description: These entries define the lower ranges of the analog input, expressed as engineering values corresponding to
the defined function of the input. The Low entry represents the engineering value at 4mA (or 1v for a V-In module) and the
High entry represents the engineering value at 20mA (or 5v). (This varies with the assigned function.) Low Value must be
less than High Value.
Critical: Low value must be less than high value (unless density input and units are API
Notes:
• These entries are not valid if a RTD temperature probe is selected as the Transducer Type for that input.
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog I/O Index: Analog I/O Range: -999.99 - [600.00] - 9999.99
High Value

Description: These entries define the lower and upper ranges of the analog input, expressed as engineering values corre-
sponding to the defined function of the input. The Low entry represents the engineering value at 4mA (or 1v for a V-In mod-
ule) and the High entry represents the engineering value at 20mA (or 5v). High Value must be greater than the Low Value.
Critical: Low value must be less than high value (unless density input and units are API)
Notes:
• These entries are not valid if a RTD temperature probe is selected as the Transducer Type for that input.
Configuration:Analog I/O:Analog Index: Analog I/O Range: -9.9 - [0.00] - 9.9

RTD Offset

Description: This parameter is used to correct the reading of the RTD input by a fixed amount.
Notes:
• This offset is applied to inputs configured as an RTD only. Note also that it is a single-point offset value.
Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog
I/O I/O Tag I/O I/O Arm I/O Meter I/O Type I/O Cal 1 I/O Cal 2 Low High RTD
Function Value value offset
1 1900 901 902 903 905 906 907 908 909 910
2 1901 911 912 913 915 916 917 918 919 920
3 1902 921 922 923 925 926 927 928 929 930
4 1903 931 932 933 935 936 937 938 939 940
5 1904 941 942 943 945 946 947 948 949 950
6 1905 951 952 953 955 956 957 958 959 960
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 111

8.2 System Directories
100—General Purpose Directories

200—Flow Control Directories
300—Volume Accuracy Directories
400—Temperature/Density Directories
500—Pressure Directories
600—Alarms Directories
800—Additives
Security
8.2.1 100—General Purpose Directory
General Purpose Directory includes:

• Date Format
• Date
• Time Format
• Time
• MAC Address
• Firmware Revision
• Maximum Available Arms
• Unit ID
• Flow Rate Time
• Flow Rate Descriptor
• Dynamic Display Timeout
• Auto Reset Timer
• Remote Browser
• Remote Browser Timeout
• Decimal/Comma Select
• Default/Translated Literals
• Start Button Disable
• Stop Button Disable
• Transaction ID
• Transaction ID Message
• Number of Batches/Transaction
• Bay Transactions
• Permissive 1 - 3 Sense
• Permissive 1 - 3 Message
• Permissive 1 - 3 Restart
System:General Purpose:Date Format
System 101
Description: This entry allows the operator to select the format used to display/print dates on the AccuLoad.
Selections:
• Month/Day/Year
• Day/Month/Year
Fatal: Invalid Date.
Page 112 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:General Purpose:Date
Description: This entry allows the operator to select the date.
Selections:
• Month/Day/Year
System:General Purpose:Time
Format/Clock
System 102
Description: This entry allows the operator to select the format used to display/print dates on the AccuLoad.
• 12 Hour
• 24 Hour
Fatal:
• Entry out of range.
• Invalid Time
Note: Date, time and date/time formats are read-only via communications; the SD command (smith protocol) or Extended Services
(Modbus protocols) must be used to set the date & time via communications.
System:General Purpose:Time
Description: This entry allows the operator to select the time.
Selections:
• Hour/Minute/AM or PM
System:General Purpose:Unit MAC Index: None Range: READ ONLY

Address
System 103
Description: This displays the MAC Address of the Ethernet interface. It is read-only.
System:General Purpose:Firmware Index: None Range: READ ONLY

Revision
System 104
Description: This displays the revision level of the firmware running in the unit. It is read-only.
System:General Purpose:Maximum Index: None Range: READ ONLY

Available Arms
System 105
Description: This displays the maximum number of arms this unit will support It is read-only.
System:General Purpose:Unit ID Index: None Range: Text 28 characters max.
System 1103
Description: This sets the Unit ID which is displayed in the center of the top line of the display.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 113

System:General Purpose:Flow Rate Index: None Range:

Time
System 111
Description: This parameter is used to define the time units used to compute the flow rate.
Selections:
• [per minute]
• per hour
System:General Purpose:Flow Rate Index: None Range: Text - maximum 7 characters

Descriptor
System 112
Description: This parameter allows an alphanumeric message to serve as the flow rate units identifier (for example, GPM,
LPM, BPH).
System:General Purpose:Dynamic Index: System Range: [0] - 99 seconds

Display Timeout
System 121
Description: This program code defines the amount of time, in seconds, that dynamic displays will remain displayed before
the AccuLoad automatically returns to the run or ready screen. A zero entry for this program code will cause the dynamic
display to remain indefinitely, until the operator manually exits the dynamic display menu.
System:General Purpose:Auto Reset Index: None Range: [0] - 99 seconds

Time
System 122
Description: This program code defines the amount of time, in minutes, before AccuLoad will return to the ready screen
in the absence of input by the operator. The auto reset feature will remove the AccuLoad from the program mode or end
transactions in progress when this parameter is set to a non-zero value. The clock starts after each button press (unless
flowing). If another button press is not made in the time set in this code, the unit will revert to the Ready display. If the
delivery has been completed and the transaction has not been ended, the AccuLoad will return to the Ready mode after
the time has expired. An entry of 0 disables this feature.
System:General Purpose:Remote Index: None Range:

Browser
System 1104
Description: This parameter is used to allow/disallow remote access to the AccuLoad over the network from a browser.
Selections:
• [Enable]
• Disable
Help: Select whether to enable/disable remote browsing.
Page 114 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:General Purpose:Remote Index: None Range: [0] - 999

Browser Timeout
System 1105
Help: Enter time in minutes for the remote browser idle timeout. Zero allows remote browsers to remain idle
indefinitely.
System:General Purpose:Decimal/Comma Index: None Range:

Select
System 131
Description: This parameter specifies whether a decimal or a comma is to be used to separate the whole and fractional
parts of numeric data. The comma is typically used in European markets. The selected delimiter is used in the program
mode and on run screens and dynamic displays local to AccuLoad, in host communications, and on delivery reports.
Selections:
• [Decimal]
• Comma
System:General Purpose:Start Key Index: None Range:

Disable
System 132
Description: Allows the enabling/disabling of the "START" button on the touch panel. When this parameter is set to
disabled, the only methods for starting a batch will be through the communication remote start command or through a
remote start input.
Selections:
• [No] (Enabled)
• Yes (Disabled)
Note(s):
• If the touch panel "START" is disabled at the AccuLoad and communications is in polling only, the AccuLoad will not be
able to start a transaction until the parameters are properly set.
• The "START" Button Enabled selection will not prohibit starting the batch via communications.
System:General Purpose:Default/ Index: None Range:

Translated Literals
System 133
Description: This parameter selects the default (English) language or a custom translation to be displayed and printed.
Selections:
• [Default]
• Translated
Note:
• If a translation has been entered on AccuMate and downloaded to the AccuLoad, the new translation will not appear on the
display until "translated literals" is selected here.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 115

System:General Purpose:Stop Button Index: System Range:

Disable
System 140
Description: This program code allows the STOP button on the AccuLoad front panel to be disabled for wild stream
blending operations. It is only available when the AccuLoad has at least one arm configured with a wild stream meter.
(i.e. the AccuLoad is not in control of one product stream). Arms that are not configured with any wild stream meter will
always stop when the STOP button is pressed, regardless of this setting.
Selections:
• [No]
• Yes
Warning: Disabling the STOP button for wild stream arms prevents an operator from using the STOP button to shut down
flow on product streams that ARE being controlled by the AccuLoad.
Important: The AccuLoad STOP button should never be relied on for Emergency Stop functionality, all control power should
be routed through systems specifically designed for this purpose ahead of the AccuLoad, see MN06201 for wiring details.
Note: Allowing the STOP button to function on a wild stream blending arm could result in an out-of-spec blend if STOP is
pressed during the blending operation.
System:General Purpose:Transaction Index: None Range: [0] - 1000000000

ID
System 134
Description: This nine-digit security number provides an additional security level for operation of the AccuLoad. If this code
is programmed with any number other than 000000000, the driver or operator is required to enter this security ID before a
transaction can be started. A 0 entry disables this feature.
System:General Purpose:Transaction Index: None Range: Text - 28 characters maximum

ID Message
System 135
Description: This code allows a 28-character alphanumeric entry to prompt during the preset operations to enter a security
ID. This message should not be programmed as blanks.
System:General Purpose:Batches per Index: None Range: 1 - [5] - 10

Transaction
System 136
Description: This program code provides the operator with the capability of setting the loading position up for the number of
batches allowed per transaction.
Fatal: Entry out of specified range.
Note: Enter the number of batches per transaction.
Warning: Changing this value deletes all stored transaction data. Re-entering the same number will not clear local storage
because the size of the transaction hasn't changed. Do not use System Code 136 to purge transactions; the Erase
Transaction Log has been provided for this purpose. For more information on Erase Transaction Log, refer to Section 5 in
this manual.
Page 116 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:General Purpose:System Index: None Range:

Status Display
System 139
Description: This program code allows the operator to determine the mode of the display interface. The factory default is
"No." Selecting "Yes" dedicates the lower panel to system status display. The upper panel is always a full-screen view of the
arm currently in focus. Selections are as follows:
• (0) No
• (1) Yes
Help: Select whether the lower panel is dedicated to the System Status view.
Note: It is reported that this parameter be set to "Yes" when in a Split Architecture configuration.
Note: Added in firmware revision 1.0.
System:General Purpose:Bay Index: None Range:

Transactions
System 1106
Description: Enables/disables Bay Transaction handling.
• [No]
• Yes
Help: Select Yes to have a single transaction recorded for all arms assigned to a bay. See application bulletin for more
information.
System:General Purpose:System Index: 1 - 3 Range:

Permissive 1, 2, 3 Sense
System 141, 144, 147

Description: Enables and defines the conditions under which a system permissive is expected to be present in order for
loading operations to be allowed.
Selections:
• [N/A] - Permissive is disabled
• Transaction Start - Permissive input is only checked immediately after authorization
• Continuous - Permissive input must be asserted continuously during the batch
• Start Pressed - Permissive input must be asserted whenever flow is started
• Batch Start - Permissive input must be asserted to start a batch
Important: Select permissive sense for loading.
System:General Purpose:Permissive Index: 1 - 3 Range: Text - 28 characters max.

1, 2, 3 Messages
System 142, 145, 148

Description: These 28-character alphanumeric messages will be displayed if a permissive sense entry, corresponding with
the message, is defined but not present when expected.
System:General Purpose:Permissive Index: 1 - 3 Range:

1, 2, 3 Restart
System 143, 146, 149

Description: Select whether batch will restart automatically or START button will be required after permissive is restored.
Selections:
• [Manual]
• Auto
Important: Select permissive sense for loading.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 117
8.2.2 200—Flow Control Directory
Flow Control Directory includes:

• Solenoid Alarm Count
• Solenoid Count Clear
• Leakage Alarm Limit
• Reverse Flow Limit
• Flow Simulator

System:Flow Control:Solenoid Index: System Range: 0 - 1000000000

Alarm Count
Disable Value: 0
System 201
Description: The AccuLoad provides counters to indicate the number of times the upstream and downstream solenoids
have been energized. This parameter sets the solenoid actuation count which when exceeded will cause a "SC: Solenoid
Count" alarm to occur (alarms 666). This alarm will only be set when the load arm is idle. Separate counters are available
for both the upstream and downstream solenoid of each meter. The counter will be incremented each time the solenoid is
energized. Clearing the alarm will not occur again until the count has been cleared and the threshold exceeded again.
The range of this parameter is 0 to 999999999. The factory default setting is 0 (which disables this feature.)
The counters are viewable from the AccuLoad's Diagnostic Menu.
The registers may be manually or automatically cleared either through the front panel or through communications.
Note: The counters will be cleared by a factory initialization or firmware upgrade.
System:Flow Control:Solenoid Index: System Range:

Count Clear
System 204
Description: This program code determines whether the solenoid actuation counts maintained by the AccuLoad are reset
when the Solenoid Counts alarm is cleared.
Selections:
• [Manual]
• Automatic
If Manual (the default) is selected, the counts are not cleared automatically when the alarm is cleared. If Automatic is
selected, then when the Solenoid Counts alarm is cleared, the counts are reset to zero immediately.
If Manual is selected, the counts can be reset manually using the diagnostic or alternately via communications using the
'SC' command.
System:Flow Control:Leakage Index: System Range: [0.0] - 999.9

Alarm Limit
System 202
Description: This parameter indicates the maximum leakage limit in delivery units between transactions. Leakage amounts
greater than the value entered in this parameter will activate a leakage alarm. The range of this parameter is 0 to 999.9. The
factory default setting is 0 (which disables this feature).
Page 118 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Flow Control:Reverse Flow Index: System Range: [0.0] - 999.9

Limit
System 203
Description: This parameter indicates the maximum reverse flow limit. When sufficient reverse flow occurs during a batch
to exceed this programmed limit, then a Reverse Flow Alarm is activated. The range of this parameter is 0 to 999.9. The
factory default setting is 0 (which disables this feature).
System:Flow Control:Flow Index: System Range:

Simulator
System 1200
Description: Enables/disables the built-in flow simulator which simulates flow based on the programmed flow profile. This
feature is used for testing or training.
Selections:
• [Disable]
• Enable
Note: This feature shall not be enabled during normal operation; changes to this option are logged in the audit trail.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 119

8.2.3 300—Volume Accuracy Directory
Volume Accuracy Directory includes:

• Pulse Transmitter Select
• Transmitter Integrity
• Reverse Volume - Batch
• Reverse Volume - Non-Resets
• Volume Units
• Mass Units
• Volume Descriptor
• Mass Descriptor
• Pulse Input Type
• Maximum Preset
• Minimum Preset
• Auto Preset
• Auto Preset Increment
• Transaction Termination
• Recipes per Transaction
• Transaction Start
• Prove Type
• Auto Prove
• Prover Output
• Run Display Options
• Preset Amount
• Preset Amount Type
• Delivery Amount Type
• Display Resolution
• Delivered Amount Display
• Update Leakage
System:Volume Accuracy:Pulse Index: None Range:

Transmitter Select
System 101
Description: Selects the transmitter pulse train type in use.
Selections:
• Single
• [Dual]
Help: Select a single or dual pulse xmitter, PT1 1(+),2(-) for single channel or A; 3(+),4(-) for channel B
System:Volume Accuracy:Transmitter Index: None Range:

Integrity
System 102
Description: Selects whether transmitter integrity is in use (/A, /B).
Selections:
• [No]
• Yes
Help: If Yes, /A and /B inputs are required for each meter channel. Meter 1 requires PT1 5(+),6(-) for /A and 7(+),8(-) for /B
Page 120 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Volume Accuracy:Reverse Index: None Range:

Volume - Batch
System 146
Description: Selects whether reverse flow is accounted for (subtracted from batch amount) when calculating batch
amounts.
Selections:
• [Ignore]
• Totalize
Help: Select if reverse amounts should count toward batch totals
System:Volume Accuracy:Reverse Index: None Range:

Volume - Non-Resets
System 147
Description: Selects whether reverse flow is accounted for (subtracted) when updating non-resettable totalizers.
Selections:
• [Ignore]
• Totalize
Help: Select if reverse amounts should count toward non-resettable totals
System:Volume Accuracy:Volume Index: None Range:

Units
System 301
Description: This parameter selects the volume units used to measure product delivery. The factory default is "Gallons."
Selections:
• [gal] - Gallons
• bbl - Barrels
• Dekaliters
• Liters
• m3 - Cubic Meters
Help: Select volume units. These are used to select proper conversion factors for calculations.
System:Volume Accuracy:Mass Units Index: Range:
System 302
Description: This parameter defines the mass units used for product measurement. The factory default is "Pounds."
Selections:
• [lb] - Pounds
• kg - Kilograms
• US Tons
• Metric Tons
• Long Tons
Help: Select mass units. These are used to select proper conversion factors for calculations.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 121

System:Volume Accuracy:Volume Index: Range: Text - 4 characters max

Descriptor
System 303
Description: This code allows a four-character entry message to serve as the display unit identifier of the volumetric
measurement units that will be displayed on the display and the reports.
System:Volume Accuracy:Mass Index: Range: Text - 4 characters max

Descriptor
System 304
Description: This code allows a four-character entry message to serve as the display unit identifier of the volumetric
measurement units that will be displayed on the display and the reports.
System:Volume Accuracy:Pulse In Index: Range:

Type
System 305
Description: This parameter allows the selection of mass pulse input rather than the default of pulses representing volume
from the meter. The AccuLoad then totalizes directly in mass. A density input is required to back-calculate volume when
using a meter that produces pulses based on mass flow.
Selections:
• [Volume]
• Mass
System:Volume Accuracy:Maximum Index: Range: 0 - 999999

Preset
System 311
Description: This six-digit entry establishes the largest volume that can be preset. If a preset amount greater than this limit
is entered, an error message will be displayed on any attempt to start a batch with more than the maximum preset value.
The factory default is "0".
Note: "0" disables the maximum preset volume check.
System:Volume Accuracy:Minimum Index: Range: 0 - 999999

Preset
System 312
Description: This six-digit entry will allow for the setting of the minimum preset amount. An error message will be displayed
on any attempt to start a batch with less than the minimum preset value. The factory default is "0".
Note: "0" disables the minimum preset volume
System:Volume Accuracy:Auto Preset Index: Range: 0 - [200] - 999999
System 313
Description: The value in this parameter will automatically be filled in as the preset amount. The preset amount can be
changed by the operator during the preset setup process. This can be useful for an operation that usually delivers the same
batch amount.
Note: "0" disables the Auto Preset.
Page 122 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Volume Accuracy:Auto Preset Index: Range: 0 - [10] - 99999

Increment
System 314
Description: This sets the amount by which the preset amount is increased or decreased by each press of the + or -
buttons next to the preset input field. See figure on page 18.
System:Volume Accuracy:Transaction Index: Range:

Termination
System 315
Description: This program code defines the primary method used to terminate a transaction. Communications can always
be used to terminate a transaction if the AccuLoad is programmed for Poll & Authorize or Remote Control operations. The
factory default is "End Transaction" button.
Selections:
• User Interface
• Communications Only
• Trans Reset Input
• Printer Tray
• Card Reader
• End Transaction - For transactions that may be remotely authorized and terminated via the user interface: The ticket printer
tray switch is ignored. The "End Transaction" button is used to end the transaction. (The transaction may also be terminated
via communications.)
• Communications control only – For transactions that will be authorized and terminated remotely (i.e., through communica-
tions): The "End Transaction" button is disabled and the ticket printer tray switch is ignored.
• Transaction reset input – For transactions that will be authorized and terminated by a master reset input, the "End Transac-
tion" button is disabled. The ticket printer tray input is used to authorize and end the transaction.
• Printer Tray Switch Input – For transactions that will be authorized and terminated by a switch input from a load printer: The
"End Transaction" button is disabled. The switch input, when active, authorizes the AccuLoad to load. When the input de-ac-
tivates, the transaction is ended. The AccuLoad will not allow loading to continue or restart until the input is re-activated (a
ticket is put in the printer).
• Card Reader – For transactions that will be authorized and terminated by the insertion and removal of the card from the
card reader. The transaction is ended when the card is pulled.
Critical (s):
• No comm port selected for communications control.
• Transaction reset input required for each arm configured.
• Printer tray switch input required for each arm configured.
• Printer tray switch input is configured [if other method is selected].
• Option not allowed if bays are configured. [Printer tray switch input]
System:Volume Accuracy:Recipes Index: Range:

per Transaction
System 316
Description: Allows either single recipe transactions or multiple recipes per transaction. If programmed for a single recipe,
the AccuLoad will only prompt the driver for a recipe at the beginning of the transaction. The driver can load multiple batches
of the recipe but only that recipe for the transaction. If programmed for multiple recipes, the driver will be prompted for the
recipe at the beginning of each batch.
Selections:
• Single Recipe per Transaction
• [Multiple] Recipes per Transaction
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 123

System:Volume Accuracy:Transaction Index: Range:

Start
System 317
Description: This parameter selects whether a transaction requires operator intervention to begin and end the transaction.
In Manual Mode, a transaction is started by the operator interaction with the user interface (touch screen) and ended when
the operator presses the "End Transaction" button. Using the Auto mode for this parameter, the Auto Preset and Auto Reset
timer are used to continuously run batches that are initiated by a Remote Start input and can be stopped by a Remote Stop
input without operator intervention. If a Remote Stop input is not used the batch would run until the Auto Preset value was
reached. The Auto mode is intended to be used in an unattended operation.
Selections:
• [Manual] Operation
• Automatic Operation
System:Volume Accuracy:Prove Type Index: Range:
System 1300
Description: Selects whether auto-proving will be done as "Net proving" or "Gross proving". If set to net, both the volume of
the liquid will be compensated for temperature as well as the volume of the proving can. If set to gross, the effect of
temperature on the liquid will be ignored.
Selections:
• [Net Proving]
• Gross Proving
System:Volume Accuracy:Auto Prove Index: Range:

Select
System 321
Description: This parameter is used to enable or disable the Automated Proving Mode. The default for this program code
will be disabled. Select one of the three security options to enable the automated prove and associated security. Once se-
lected and the security activated, the beginning of the next transaction will launch the auto prove. Once the prove is complet-
ed and the meter factor calculated, the operator has the choice of downloading the calculated meter factor into the software
or ignoring it.
Selections:
• [Disabled]
• Security input not required
• Security input 1 required
• Security input 2 required
Critical: Security input not configured
Note: Auto proving is described in MN06146.
System:Volume Accuracy:Prover Index: Range: 1 - 14

Output
System 323
Description:
Selections:
• [Auto Prove Meter]
• Pulse Input 1 - 14
Page 124 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Volume Accuracy: High Speed Prover Index: Range:

Pulse Output
Description: This parameter defines which pulse input is echoed to the high speed prover pulse output terminals. The
feature is designed to ease proving operations by redirecting the selected meter to a pair of terminals which can be field-
wired for proving personnel access. Although with both the A4M and A4B boards present there could be two PIB III boards
installed, only one output at a time will be activated. This will allow the outputs to be wired in parallel to provide a common
connection point external to the AccuLoad for proving personnel access, independent of the meter currently being proved.
Select 0 in this parameter to utilize this functionality. Alternately, any individual pulse input can be configured to be echoed
to the high speed prover output. Selections are as follows:
• Echo meter selected via Auto Proving
• Echo pulse input #1 - 6 - EAAI
• Echo pulse input #7 - 12 - BSE
Critical: Security input not configured
Volume Accuracy: Run Display Index: Range:

Description: This parameter defines which arrangement the AccuLoad IV will use for the delivery display. The default
delivery display contains a transaction counter and a preset downcounter. A downcounter starts at the preset volume and
counts down to zero, indicating the remaining volume throughout the batch. The US W&M display uses a smaller font for
this down-counter, and prefixes it with a "Remain" prompt. The "Blank Downcounter" option prevents the downcounter from
appearing. Selections are as follows:
• Default Display
• Blank Downcounter
• US Weights and Measures Display
Note: This option will have no effect while the AccuLoad IV is in the proving mode.
System:Volume Accuracy:Preset Index: Range:

Amount Type
System 332
Description: This program code selects the registration type used to enter the preset value. This registration type is also
used for the downcounter display.
Selections:
• IV - Indicated volume
• [GV - Gross volume]
• GST volume
• GSV volume
• Mass
Note: Selected units not available.
Batch Reverse Flow Accumulation Index: Pulse Input Selection: Ignore or Count
Nonresettable Reverse Flow Accumulation Index: Pulse Input Selection: Ignore or Count
Description: This program code allows for the detection and accumulation of reverse flow when using a dual-pulse trans-
mitter (quadrature detection).
• Ignore (do not include reverse flow in totals)
• Count (include reverse flow in batch totals)
If this option is enabled (by selecting ‘1’) then measured flow in the reverse direction is accumulated and the amount is
deducted from the batch amount.
This feature requires Dual Pulse meter inputs. This feature is not available when Transmitter Integrity is selected. Meter
pulse input wiring is as for dual pulse meters with integrity, however / A is not required to be wired to the Pulse Input Board
to use this feature.
Critical(s):
• Cannot totalize reverse flow with transmitter integrity (hardware limitation).
Note(s):
• Meters are typically not proved in the reverse direction and this amount may not be accurate. Reverse flow is typically
considered an error and should not be part of normal operation.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 125

System:Volume Accuracy:Delivery Index: Range:

Amount Type
System 333
Description: This code establishes how the delivery registration display (up-counter) will appear during operation. Five
possible selections are available that are dependent on the needs of the operation.
Selections:
• IV - Indicated volume
• GV - Gross volume
• GST volume
• [GSV volume]
• Mass
Note: Selected units not available.
System:Volume Accuracy:Display Index: Range:

Resolution
System 334
Description: This program codes selects the resolution that will be used by AccuLoad for the delivery up-counter and
down-counter during normal operations. The factory default is "Whole."
Selections:
• Whole units
• 10ths - Tenths
• [100ths - Hundredths]
System:Volume Accuracy:Delivered Index: Range:

Amount/Upcounter
System 335
Description: This parameter selects whether the up-counter represents the batch delivered amount or the transaction
delivered amount on the delivery screen.
Selections:
• [Transaction]
• Batch
System:Volume Accuracy:Update Index: Range:

Leakage
System 336
Description: Leakage (flow that occurs between transactions) may be added to the non-resettable totals either dynamically
or at the start of the next transaction. The factory default is "Trans Start" which indicates that the non-resettable totals will be
updated with leakage at the start of the next transaction. To have the non-resettable totals updated as the leakage occurs,
choose "Dynamic". To insure the true end of transaction non-resettable totals are retrieved (i.e. not including leakage which
may have occurred after the transaction was ended), review the VT host command in the Smith communications manual
(MN06204L).
Selections:
• [Transaction Start]
• Dynamic
Page 126 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.2.4 400—Temperature/Density Directory
Temperature/Density Directory includes:

• Temperature Units
• Reference Temperature
• Density Units
• Density Prompt
System:Temperature/Density:Tempera- Index: Range:

ture Units Default: Not Used
System 401
Description: This program code selects the temperature scale used by AccuLoad.
Selections:
• [NA]
• [°F] - Fahrenheit
• °C - Celsius
Critical: API table conflicts with selected units
Note: A zero entry, signifying No Temperature Selected, will disable all temperature-related calculations.
System:Temperature/Density:Reference Index: Range: 0 - [60.0] - 999.9

Temperature
System 402
Description: This parameter defines the reference temperature from which temperature corrections are made. Typical entry
units are 60°F, and 15°C.
Note: Temperature units are defined in a separate parameter.
Critical: API table conflicts with selected units
System:Temperature/Density:Density Index: Range:

Units
System 411
Description: This selection allows the operator to choose which density scale will be used if there is a densitometer
installed. It is used to convert volume to mass.
Selections:
• NA
• [°API]
• Lb/Ft3 (Pounds/Cubic Feet)
• Kg/M3 (Kilograms/Cubic Meter)
• Relative Density
Note: When using temperature compensation, a value (API, Lb/Ft3, or Kg/M3) must be entered in this parameter.
System:Temperature/Density:Density Index: Range:

Prompt
System 412
Description: This parameter defines whether the operator will be prompted for a density entry prior to starting a batch.
Selections:
• [No]
• Always
• In Standby
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 127
8.2.5 500—Pressure Directory
Pressure Directory includes:

• Pressure Units
• Atmospheric Pressure
System:Pressure:Pressure Units Index: Range:
System 501
Description: This parameter defines the pressure units used by AccuLoad.
Selections:
• NA
• [psi]
• bar
• kg/cm2 (Kilograms/square centimeter)
• kPa (kilopascals)
Note: If "NA" is selected, signifying no pressure transducer installed, any associated parameters will be removed from the
menus in Program Mode.
System:Pressure:Atmospheric Pressure Index: Range: [0.000] - 999.999
System 502
Description: Sets the local atmospheric pressure used in GPA TP-15 (gauge pressure) vapor pressure calculations. This
should be set to the average local atmospheric air pressure.
Page 128 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.2.6 600—Alarm Configuration Directory
Alarm Directory includes: • F.A. Sening COP Alarm 665

• Driver Alarm Clearing • High Density Alarm 607
• Powerfail Alarm • High Flow Alarm 608
• Program Alarm Outputs • High Pressure Alarm 609
• Alarm Configuration for each alarm • High Temperature Alarm 610
• User Alarm Configuration and • Injector Auto Detect 643
• User Alarm Messages for each user • Injector Solenoid Counts 1607
alarm • Injector Command Rejected 631
• Low Additive Alarm 611
Alarm Responses • Low Density Alarm 612
• Additive Clean Line 630 • Low Flow Alarm 613
• Additive Comm Failure 602 • Low Pressure Alarm 614
• Additive Comm Totals 662 • Low Temperature Alarm 615
• Additive Excess Pulses 616 • Mass Meter Comm Fail 652
• Additive Feedback Error 606 • Network Printer Alarm 664
• Additive Frequency Alarm 622 • No Additive Pulses Alarm 617
• Additive High Temperature Alarm 655 • Overspeed Injector 629
• Additive Injector Error 628 • Predict Overrun Alarm 668
• Additive Low Temperature Alarm 656 • Pressure Transducer Alarm 620
• Additive Pulse Security 659 • Printer Alarm 641
• Additive Temperature Probe 657 • Product Overrun 638
• Additive Unauthorize Failed Alarm 626 • Product Solenoid Counts 666
• Additive Xmit Integrity 660 • Product Stop Alarm 661
• Add-Pak 1 Diagnostic (x2) 645 • Product Zero Flow 639
• Add-Pak 2 Powerfail Alarm 1600 • Promass Meter Alarm 667
• Add-Pak Power Fail 1 (x2) • Pulse Security Alarm 621
• Add-Pak 2 Power Fail Alarm 1601 • Report Storage Full Alarm 681
• A4I1/AICB Auto Detect 646 • Reverse Flow 670
• A4I2/AICB Auto Detect 1602 • Shared Printer Alarm 623
• A4I1/AICB Commfail 647 • Storage Full Alarm 650
• A4I2/AICB Commfail 1603 • Temperature Probe Alarm 624
• Arm Overrun Alarm 618 • Ticket Alarm 632
• Arm Zero Flow Alarm 627 • Transmitter Integrity Alarm 619
• Back Pressure Alarm 603 • Valve Fault Alarm 625
• Bay A Excess Active Arms 649
• Bay B Excess Active Arms 1604 User Alarm Configuration
• Blend High Alarm 636 • User Alarms 1 - 10, 671-680
• Blend Low Alarm 637
• Block Valve Alarm 635 User Alarm Messages
• Card Removed Alarm 658 • User Alarms 1 - 10 Messages, 686-695
• Clean Line Alarm 634
• Communications Alarm 604
• CTL Calculation Alarm 1605
• DE Head Alarm 651
• Density Transducer Alarm 605
• Email Error 1606
• Leakage Alarm 669
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 129

System:Default Alarms:Driver Alarm Index: Range: 0 - [5] - 20

Clearing
System 601
Description: This parameter defines the number of alarms that can be cleared in the Run and Ready modes without enter-
ing a passcode. In addition, the alarms to be cleared must be configured to be clearable in the Run/Ready mode. When this
number of alarms has been cleared, subsequent alarms require a passcode entry to clear, even if they are programmed for
Run/Ready mode clearing.
System:Default Alarms:Powerfail Index: None Range:

Alarm
System 137
Description: This program code provides the operator with the capability of either enabling or disabling the powerfail alarm.
The powerfail alarm is a diagnostic alarm that is not clearable through communications.
Selections:
• [Enable]
• Disable
System:Default Alarms:Program Alarm Index: Range:

Output
System 682
Description: The AccuLoad provides two digital outputs which are energized when an alarm occurs. This parameter
controls whether programming error alarms will activate these outputs.
Selections:
• [BOTH] - Both relays enabled
• ALRM1 - Output Relay #1 Only
• ALRM2 - Output Relay #2 Only
• NONE - No Relays Enabled
Alarm Actions
The action(s) taken when an alarm occurs and if a passcode is required to clear the
alarm can be selected for each individual alarm type. The options are as follows:
• Allow run/ready clearing - no need for a passcode to clear the alarm

• Energize alarm relay #1 - if configured, alarm output #1 will be asserted
• Energize alarm relay #2 - if configured, alarm output #2 will be asserted
• Send Notification Email - if configured, an email notification will be sent*
• Allow Flow to Continue - do not stop the flow when the alarm occurs
*If this option is checked and a valid server and user is configured, an email will
be issued by the AccuLoad to the address specified in the email Notification.
Page 130 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 172: Edit Program Code Data

The combination of these program codes and new options will provide the
information required to transmit e-mail notifications on specified events, and check
for replies to alarm events that signal the alarm should be cleared remotely. Replies
will only be accepted from the programmed e-mail Notification Destination address.
To clear the alarm remotely, “Reply” to the notification. The reply message sent must
contain the alarm message in the body of the response message (nothing else needs
to be included). The AccuLoad will recognize the message sent to it by the alarm
message previously send and will clear the appropriate alarm (if it is clearable).
System:Alarms:Default Alarms:Alarm Index: per built-in Range:

Actions Alarm
Description: These parameters allow the actions of each alarm to be configured. Multiple options selected from the
following list may be configured for each alarm.
Selections:
• Allow Run/Ready Mode Clear
• Energize Alarm Output 1
• Send via Email
• Allow Flow to Continue
Note: Through Communications, add binary bits to get combination of desired options (e.g., 7 would set up the first three
options.)
Note: Allow Flow to Continue is available with Unlimited Preset arms only.
System:Default Alarms:User Alarms:User Index: per User Range: 1 - 10; 18 characters maximum
Alarm Configuration and User Alarm Alarm
Message
System - See table below

Description: These program codes allow the operator to customize the AccuLoad by defining alarm conditions to a
particular system. User alarms may be set through communications or Boolean/algebraic equations, or may be selected
from the following:
• Allow Run/Ready Mode Clear
• Notify via email
• Allow Flow to Continue
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 131
Default Alarm/User Alarms Configuration Message

1 671 686
2 672 687
3 673 688
4 674 689
5 675 690
6 676 691
7 677 692
8 678 693
9 679 694
10 680 695
8.2.7 700—Communications Directory
Communications Directory includes:

• Arm Addresses
• Printer Control
• Host Interface
• Card/Nedap Reader
• Serial Port Config
• Prompts
8.2.7.1 Arm 1 - 6 Addresses
System:Communications:Arm Index: Arm Range: 1 - 99

Address
System 701 - 706

Description: This two-digit entry defines the communications address associated with this load arm. For multiple
AccuLoads on a shared serial communications line, all addresses must be unique.
Critical: Address must not be zero.
Critical: Addresses must be unique.
Fatal: Entry out of specified range
Note: Load Arm 3 – 6 Address - Not used on AccuLoad-ST hardware.
Page 132 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.2.7.2 Printer Control
System:Communications:Printer Index: None

Control:Printer Standby
System 727
Description: This parameter defines how the AccuLoad reacts when a transaction report fails to print.
If "Standby" is selected, the AccuLoad will silently enter printer standby mode (no alarm will be set or displayed) when a
transaction report fails to print within the programmed communications port timeout. An event will be logged in the event
log indicating that the transaction report is pending. A printer standby flag will be available via communications (see EE
command) which will indicate when there are pending transaction reports.
If "Standby & Alarm" is selected and Network Printing, XON/XOFF or PTB printing is being used, the AccuLoad will set the
"NP: Network Printer" or "PP: Printer" alarm respectively and will enter printer standby mode. These alarms are configurable
in the Alarms Directory and therefore do not necessarily need to stop flow. If choosing this option, be sure to configure the
alarm appropriately. No alarm will be set if using serial printing with no flow control.
If "Alarm + No Trans" is selected, the AccuLoad will set the associated printer alarm as above but will not enter standby
mode. Although the alarm may be cleared, the AccuLoad will not allow a new transaction to start on that arm until the
pending transaction has been successfully printed.
Selections:
• [NA]
• Silent Standby
• Standby and Alarm
• Alarm and No Transaction
Critical: Select if desired to protect transaction reports not printed and if alarm should be set when the report is not printed.

Control:Auto Reprint
System 728
Description: The AccuLoad may be configured to automatically reprint pending transaction reports using this parameter.
The AccuLoad will always attempt to print a transaction report when the transaction is ended. If a report is successfully print-
ed and there are pending reports, then the pending reports will be printed as well.
Selections:
• [No]
• Yes
The AccuLoad will only reprint pending reports on idle arms. If a transaction is in progress on an arm, then the pending
reports on that arm will not be printed until the arm becomes idle. If any report fails to print, the printing of any remaining
reports will be aborted.

Control:Auto Tear Off
System 729
Description: When enabled, the AccuLoad will function with a printer's auto tear off feature. The tear off feature is when a
printer automatically advances the paper to the tear off position after a form feed is received (a form feed is at the end of the
print job).
Selections:
• [No]
• Yes
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 133

8.2.7.3 Host Interface
System:Communications:Host In- Index: System

terface:Comm Link Programming
System 731
Description: Defines which parameters can be modified through communications by the access level assigned to those
parameters. The factory default is "Level 1 Access."
Selections:
• [Alarm Clearing Only] - This selection allows only the alarms to be reset (cleared) through communications.
• Level 1 Access Parameters
• Level 5 Access Parameters - These selections limit the parameters that can be changed through communications to
those assigned a security level at or below the option selected.
System:Communications:Host Index: None

Interface:Modbus Endian
System 732
Description: This program code defines the byte order for floating point values returned by Modbus communications.
AccuLoad supports three variations of byte ordering when sending floating point values via Modbus protocols. The factory
default and AccuLoad native byte order is "Big."
Selections:
• [Big] endian - bytes are ordered most significant first
• Little 8 endian - bytes are ordered least significant first

Interface:Timeout Action
System 733
Description: Standby mode allows the AccuLoad to continue to allow transactions in the case where host control has been
lost.
Selections:
• [Alarm]
• Standby
• Alarm and Standby

Interface:Inhibit Auto Focus
System 734
Description: This program code, when selected, prevents the automation SB, SF, AP, WD, WP, WQ, and WX functions from
changing the focus of the display. (The FS command will still result in a focus change.) Selections are as follows:
• (0) No
• (1) Yes
Help: Select if it is not desired to automatically change the focus to an arm receiving communication prompt commands (SB,
SF, AP, WD, WP, WQ, WX).
Note: This parameter is only available when using Revision 1.0 and above firmware.
Page 134 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)


Interface:IP Discovery
System 1700
Description: This setting selects whether the AccuLoad is configured with a fixed Ethernet IP address or it should obtain an
address automatically from a DHCP server on the network.
Selection:
• [Manual]
• DHCP
System:Communications:Host Index: None Range: 000.000.000.000

Interface: Internal IP Address
System 1720
Description: Sets the network communications address associated with the AccuLoad. For multiple AccuLoads on a shared
communications line, all addresses must be unique.
Help: Refer to section 6.4 or 6.5 for additional information on changing the Internal IP Address.
Note: See Section 8.8 Split Architecture Directories for additional Split Architecture parameters.

Interface: THMI IP Address
System 1721
Description: Sets the network communications address associated with the AccuLoad's MMI.
In a Split Architecture configuration, the THMI IP Address is associated with MMI A. If multiple MMIs are used the THMI IP
Address must be unique.
If parameter 1003 Board Set Function is set to No HMI or HMI B, the THMI IP Address should be set to 0.0.0.0.
Note: See Section 8.8 Split Architecture Directories for additional Split Architecture parameters.

Interface: THMI B IP Address
System 1722
Description: Sets the network communications address associated with the AccuLoad's MMI B when using a Split
Architecture configuration.
The THMI B IP Address must be unique.
If parameter 1003 Board Set Function is set to No Split Arch, No HMI, or HMI A, the THMI B IP Address should be set to
0.0.0.0
Note: See Section 8.8 Split Architecture Directories for additional Split Architecture parameters

Interface:Netmask
System 736
Description: The netmask (sometimes called a subnet mask) is a four octet address used to define a network. This address
uses the same format as the IP address. A typical netmask is 255.255.255.0. This means that the first three octets describe
a particular network and the last octet describes a specific device. If the AccuLoad is assigned IP address 192.168.0.1 and
a printer has IP address 192.168.0.9, then the two devices are on the same network because the first three octets of each
address are the same. In order to increase the number of devices on a particular network, simply adjust the netmask. In
the previous examples, the netmask allowed 256 devices to be connected to the network. If more devices are needed on a
network, then the netmask of 255.255.254.0 would allow 512 devices to be connected to the network. Similarly, a network of
255.255.253.0 would allow 1024 devices to be connected and so on.
• 4 octet numeric entry – 255.255.255.255
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 135


Interface:Gateway
System 737
Description: The Gateway address is another four octet address that also uses the same format as the IP address. A
Gateway provides an exit route for all addresses that are not part of the local network. The Gateway address typically
belongs to a network device such as a router. The router can then connect to another local network or to the internet.
The entry for 'System 737-Gateway' should be the IP address for the router that your AccuLoad IV.net uses to connect to
any IP addresses not in your local subnet. If you don't have a router and are not connected to external networks, you can
leave this entry 0.0.0.0.
• 4 octet numeric entry – 255.255.255.255

Interface:Ethernet Host Control
System 738
Description: This program code determines what level of control is exhibited by a host interfaced to the AccuLoad via the
Ethernet interface.
Selections:
• Polling Only
• [Poll & Program]
• Poll & Authorize
• Remote Control
The highest level of control programmed among this entry and the serial port entries is assumed to be the desired level of
control for the AccuLoad.
System:Communications:Host Index: None Range: [0] - 999

Interface:Ethernet Timeout
System 739
Description: This entry specifies the timeout value in seconds for the host communication protocols via Ethernet/TC-IP
network (Smith I/P, Modbus TCP) before a communications alarm will be generated. A zero entry disables the time out
action. Range is 0-999
• 3 digit numeric entry

Interface:Host User Text Archived
System 777
Help Message: When this option is selected, the 8 32-character user text fields available for writing/reading by the host
(via BW/ BR commands) are stored along with the final transaction data when a transaction ends. This allows a host to not
just place relevant text on the immediate bill of lading/receipt ticket, but also allows the AccuLoad.net to recall the data and
to reprint the ticket later with the same information.
Selections:
• Not Saved
• Saved
Enabling this option (selecting 'Stored') will reduce the total number of transactions that can be archived at the AccuLoad in
the transaction log since it increases the size of each stored transaction.
Page 136 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)


Interface:DNS Server IP
System 780
Sets the IP address of the primary DNS server on the Ethernet network.
The DNS (Domain Name Service) provides a mechanism for Internet devices to obtain the IP address of another device on
the network using a text based name instead of a numeric address.
This IP address will be used by the AccuLoad to resolve host names if host names are entered instead of IP
addresses for the remote servers (specifically, the SMTP & POP3 servers and network printers at this time).
System:Communications:Host Index: None Range: Text - 28 characters max.

Interface:SMTP Server Name
System 781
Enter the host name for the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server that provides the email account set up for the
AccuLoad.
Examples:
if using DNS - smtp.yourmailserver.com
If using IP address - 192.168.0.98
To utilize the email features, an email account must be set up for each AccuLoad on a mail service provider that
supports SMTP (and optionally POP3) access.
Enter up to 28 characters of text
Enter the server name or IP address of the SMTP server
System:Communications:Host Index: None Range: Text - 28 characters max.

Interface:POP3 Server Name
System 782
Description: Enter the host name or IP address of the POP3 (Post Office Protocol
- 3) server that provides the email account to which the AccuLoad should send email notifications of alarms conditions.
Examples:
If using DNS - pop.yourmailserver.com
If not using DNS - 192.168.0.99
System:Communications:Host In- Index: None Range: Text - 28 characters

terface:Email Account User Name
System 783
Description: Enter the user name on the email account to use to send email notifications.
System:Communications:Host Index: None Range: Text - 28 characters

Interface: Email Account Password
System 784
Description: Enter the password for the email account used to send email notifications.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 137


Interface:Email Notify Address
System 785
Description: Enter the email address where notification emails will be sent when an alarm configured for notification
occurs. The AccuLoad.net must have access to an SMTP server that is capable of forwarding emails to the destination
for this feature to operate.

Interface:Email Address for Reply
(FROM address)
System 786
Description: Enter the email address to be used in the <FROM> field of notification emails sent by this AccuLoad. For
example, if the email server is at yourmailhere.com, and the Email account name is AL3NET_1, then the reply-to address
would be AL3NET_1@yourmailhere.com

Interface:Network Printer
System 787
Description: Enter the IP address (or printer name if DNS server is available and the printer has a name in the domain) of
the network printer where the AccuLoad.net is to send print jobs.
The network printer can be used in place of or in conjunction with serial printer options.

Interface:BlueTooth Master Enable
/ Disable
System 788
Description: This parameter is to select the Master AccuLoad when interfacing via the Smith Meter/Sening Cross Over
prevention (COP) system via a Bluetooth interface. One and only one of the AccuLoads sharing a Bluetooth module should
be configured as a master.
Selections:
• [Disabled] (AccuLoad is not designated as a master)
• Enabled (Designate this AccuLoad as the Bluetooth master.
8.2.7.4 Card/Nedap Reader
System:Communications:Card/ Index: None

Nedap Reader:HMI Card Reader
System 1701
Description: Used to specify whether card reader is connected directly to the AccuLoad or remotely (on the HMI).
Selections:
• [No]
• Yes
Page 138 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Communications:Card/ Index: System

Nedap Reader:Card ID Validation
System 771
Description: This parameter defines the type of operator validation required by the card reader prior to initiating a
transaction. The factory default is "ID Stamp Only." If "Standalone/Standby" is selected, the AccuLoad operates as if
"ID Stamp Only" was selected while under host control.
Selections:
• [ID Stamp Only]
• ID Stamp and Card-In Required
• Standalone/Standby
• Validate Always
Note: If an MMI port is configured and no card reader is being used, this parameter should be set to (0) ID Stamp Only;
otherwise, card data will be expected.
System:Communications:Card/ Index: System Range: 0 - 99 minutes

Nedap Reader:Card ID Timeout
System 772
Description: This entry indicates the period that new card data will remain valid when no transactions are in progress.
On new card data, this timer is reset to 1 and begins to increment each minute until either a transaction is started or the
timer reaches the value programmed and expires. On expiration, the card data is erased. If programmed for any validation
selection other than ID stamp only, loading will be prevented until a valid card is again presented to the reader, or until the
next message from the card reader containing successfully read data is received.
Once a transaction is started within the card data valid timeout period, other transactions may be started on other arms.
Only when all transactions on all arms in the unit have been ended, will the valid card status will be removed.
A value of zero for this program entry indicates the timer should never expire. The card data will remain valid until a
transaction is started and will remain valid until all transactions are ended.
Critical: Card reader must be attached to MMI if using an MMI.
System:Communications:Card/ Index: System

Nedap Reader:Card Reader
Configuration
System 773
Description: This selects the operating mode of the card reader. Momentary is used when a card will be "swiped" to access
the AccuLoad. The captive option requires the card to be continuously present in front of the card reader to remain valid.
Selections:
• [Momentary]
• Captive Card mode
Note: A new option has also been added to System 315 – Transaction Termination to allow selection of card removal as a
means of ending a transaction. This is to ensure that in Captive Card mode the operator cannot leave his card behind, as
the transaction cannot be ended until the card is removed.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 139

System:Communications:Card/ Index: None

Nedap Reader:Card Authorization
System 774
Description: Select if it is desired for a valid card to allow multiple transactions to be started or only for the next transaction
that is started.
• [All Arms]
• Single Transaction
Note: Single Trans authorization is not available with "captive card" reader option (773).
Sytem:Communications:Card/ Index: None

Nedap Reader:Vehicle ID Tag
System 775
Description: Used to select which of the standard AccuLoad prompts should be used to prompt the driver for the vehicle ID
tag when it is not electronically read from the trailer.
Selections:
• [N/A]
• Prompt 1
• Prompt 2
• Prompt 3
• Prompt 4
• Prompt 5
Page 140 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.2.7.5 Serial Port Configuration 1 - 4
System:Communications:Serial Index: Serial comm Range:

Port Configuration:Function port
System 707
Description: This program code defines the function of the communications port. The factory default is "Minicomp Host" on
comm port 1. Selections are as follows:
• N/A – This communications port is not selected for use.
• Term Host – This communications port communicates with a terminal type device using a simplified communications
protocol
• [Minicomp Host] – This communications port communicates with a minicomputer type device using a sophisticated and
secure communications protocol
• Modbus Host
• Printer – Permits the AccuLoad through this communication port to automatically output an end of a transaction report to a
printer connected to the AccuLoad
• Shared Printer – Same as number (4) above except the output report will go to a shared printer connected to one or more
AccuLoads. (This requires special wiring. See the Installation manual for further details.)
• Smart Inj/AICB/A4I – Permits the AccuLoad through this communication port to communicate with and control up to twen-
ty-four smart additive injector systems
• E+H Promass – Assigns a communication channel to an E+H Promass Coriolis Meter.
• Smith Meter Card Reader – Assigns a communications channel to the Smith Meter Card Reader Interface board, allowing
passage of card data to a host computer
• Nedap Reader – For connection to a Nedap access control device
• F.A. Sening COP – Enables the interface to the F.A. Sening cross over prevention.
The communications port control must be correctly configured for the selected function.
Fatal: Baud rates below 9600 are no longer supported. (They remain in the select list for backward compatibility).
Critical: Shared printing is only possible on port 1
Critical: An address must not be zero.
Critical: A maximum of two ports may be configured for injector control.
Critical: A maximum of two ports may be configured for printer functions.
Critical: A maximum of two ports may be configured for host interface.
Critical: Modbus requires 8-bit data.
Critical: Function conflicts with Port Control.
Note: it is possible to program multiple host control ports for redundancy purposes. Note that only one host control port should
be issuing control commands at any one time. It is up to the automation system to prevent conflicts when using this feature.
System:Communications:Serial Index: Serial port Range: 1200 - [57600] - 115200

Port Config:Baud Rate
System 708
Description: Sets the speed of the associated communications port.
Selections:
• 9600, 19200, 38400, [57600], or 115200 baud.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 141

System:Communications:Serial Index: Serial port Range:

Port Config:Data/Parity
System 709
Description: This parameter defines the number of data bits and parity used by the associated communications port.
Unless indicated otherwise, one stop bit is used.
Selections:
• 7 bits No Parity
• 7 bits Odd Parity
• 7 bits Even Parity
• [8 bits No Parity]
• 8 bits Odd Parity
• 8 bits Even Parity
• 8 bits No Parity, 2 Stop bits
Critical: Modbus requires 8-bit data.

Port Config:Control
System 710
Description: This program code sets the level of control the associated communications port commands. Polling Only, Poll
and Authorize, and Remote Control are valid with host communications options. XON/XOFF is valid with printer options.
Only one port can have transaction control. The factory default is "Poll & Program." Selections are as follows:
• N/A – No communications on this port.
• Polling Only – No transaction control, display control or programming allowed via this port. Able to read program code
values and run data from the unit.
• Poll & Authorize – Full programming/prompting control. Transaction control requiring authorization from host. Allows use
of AccuLoad communications commands such as AU Authorize Transaction and AP Authorize Transaction and Preset for
host authorization. Designed for terminals where the driver enters desired preset volume after authorization.
• Remote Control – Full programming and prompting control. Transaction control (also requiring authorization from host)
Allows use of SB – Set Batch to enter the preset remotely and EB to end the batch remotely. This is designed for pre-dis-
patch operations where the driver has limited input during the load process and the preset is host-controlled.
• XON/XOFF – For printer ports only. XON/XOFF flow control.
• [Poll & Program] – For use with AccuMate ports. Allows full program access but does not affect transaction control (acts
like a standalone unit).
• PTB-FX – Security level designed to support PTB Weights and Measures Agency-approved printer interface.
• PTB-LQ – Security level designed to support PTB Weights and Measures Agency-approved printer interface.
Critical: Comm port not configured for host communications.
Critical: Comm port not configured for printer.
System:Communications:Serial Index: None Range: [0] - 999 seconds

Port Config:Timeout
System 711
Description: These three-digit codes allow the operator to specify the amount of time, in seconds, before aborting a
communications transfer that has halted. The communications alarm will then be set. This entry is also used to abort a
printout if waiting for a shared printer on an XON from a printer. If the timer expires while waiting for a shared printer, the
shared printer alarm will be set.
If the port is configured for host communication, zero disables the communications timeout and the accompanying alarm.
If the port is configured for a printer, the timeout cannot be disabled.
Critical: No entry if corresponding function = Not Used.
Critical: Comm port not configured for printer.
Note: Enter elapsed time in seconds of comm fail before signaling an alarm.
Page 142 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)


Port Config:Serial Interface
System 1702
Description: Sets the serial port for RS-232 or RS-485
Selections:
• [RS-232]
• RS-485

Port Config:RS-485 Duplex
System 1706
Description: Sets the mode of RS-485 serial communications.
Selections:
• [Full Duplex] - 4-wire
• Half Duplex - 2-wire

Port Config:Termination Resistors
System 1710, 1711, 1712

Description: Enables or disables the on-board termination resistors for RS-485 serial ports
Selections:
• [Disabled]
• Enabled
8.2.7.6 Prompts
System:Communications:Prompts: Index: None

Prompt Mode
System 740
Description: This program code selects when prompts will be displayed.
Selections:
• [Transaction Start]
• Standby
System:Communications:Prompts: Index: None Range: 0 - [2] - 5

Prompts Used
0 disables this feature
System 741
Description: Sets the number of built-in prompts to present to the operator at the start of the transaction setup screen
sequence. The response(s) entered by the operator get stored as part of the transaction record by the AccuLoad and can
be printed on the Transaction Report and/or retrieved through communications.
System:Communications:Prompts: Index: None Range: 0 [30] - 99 seconds

Prompt Timeout
System 742
Description: This two-digit entry defines the amount of time, in seconds, that a local prompt will remain displayed at
AccuLoad before the prompting sequence is aborted and AccuLoad returns to the ready screen. If set to zero the AccuLoad
will wait indefinitely for data entry in response to a prompt. The factory default is "0".
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 143
System:Communications:Prompts: Index: None

Prompt Validation
System 758
Description: Selects how the AccuLoad validates (using the built-in driver database) the data entered by the operator in
response to a prompt. Options 1 and 2 are used only if no card reader is installed on the system. If Option 3 is selected, a
card reader must be in place because with that option, ID validation is performed by using the card data. Once the card data
has been verified, the PIN is compared with the previously defined PIN for that card in the database.
Selections:
• [None]
• ID
• ID & PIN
• PIN
Critical: Selection invalid when using Card Reader (for Options 1 and 2 above).
Critical: Prompt Response Type cannot be alphanumeric for PIN entry.
Critical: Card Validation must be enabled in 761 for this option (for Option 3 above).
System:Communications:Prompts: Index: Per Prompt, 5 max. Range: Text - 28 characters max.

Prompt Message

Description: Defines the message displayed on the screen to prompt the operator for information.
System:Communications:Prompts: Index: Per Prompt, 5 max. Range:

Prompt Input Type

Description: This parameter defines whether numeric or alphanumeric data entered in response to a local prompt will echo
to the screen or display Xs in place of digits as a security feature.
Selections:
• [Numeric] - shown on screen
• Hidden - numeric, X's shown on screen
• Alphanumeric
System:Communications:Prompts: Index: Per Prompt, 5 max. Range: 0 - [9] - 25 characters

Prompt Length

Description: Sets the maximum length of a response to a prompt.
Communications/Prompts Prompt Message Prompt Input Type Prompt Length

Prompt 1 743 744 745
Prompt 2 746 747 748
Prompt 3 749 750 751
Prompt 4 752 753 754
Prompt 5 755 756 757
Page 144 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.2.8 800—Additive Directory
Additives (common) Menu

• Number of Injectors
• Additive Selection Method
• Additive Pacing Units
• Additive Stop Option
• Additive Stop Amount
• Additive Stop Disable
• Additive Stop Pump Action
• Additive Injection Units
• Additive Totals Units
• Inject to Totals Convert
• Clean Line Additive
• Piston Feedback Errors
• Piston Stop Action
• Alarm Pulse Count
• Alarm Pulse time
• FC Inj Additive Totals
• FC Inj Channel Select
• FC Inj Error Count
• FC Inj Error Reset
• FC Inj Error Amount
• Injection Window Percentage
Additive Config Menu (1 - 24)

• Injector Tag
• Injector Type
• Injector Arm
• Injector Plumbing
• Injector Address
• Injector K Factor
• Injector Meter Factor
• Injector High Tolerance
• Injector Low Tolerance
• Injector Maximum Tolerance Errors
8.2.8.1 Additives (Common)
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None Range: 0 - [24]

mon:Number of Injectors
System 020
Description: The total number of injectors controlled by this AccuLoad
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 145

System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: System

mon:Additive Selection
Method
System 801
Description: This parameter defines how additive injectors will be selected for delivery. Only those additives programmed
for a recipe will be available. The selection of available additives may be further limited with a communications command
from an automation system.
Selections:
• [Automatic] – No selection is required or allowed when presetting. All the injectors that are programmed, less those dis-
abled via automation communications, will automatically pulse when the unit is loading
• Transaction – Manual selection of the injectors at the start of the transaction. At the start of each transaction, the operator
will be prompted to select the desired injectors prior to presetting
• Batch – Manual selection of the injectors at the start of each batch. At the start of each batch, the operator will be prompt-
ed to select the desired injectors prior to presetting
• Standby Transaction
• Standby Batch
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: System Range:

mon:Additive Pacing Units Default: [IV]
System 802
Description: This program code selects the volume type used to pace the additive injectors.
Selections:
• [Indicated volume (IV)]
• Gross volume (GV)
• GST volume (GST)
• GSV volume (GSV)
• Mass
Critical: Selected units not available.
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None

mon:Additive Stop Option
System 803
Description: This parameter defines when the additive injection will stop for each batch. It also determines whether the rate
will be recalculated so that the total amount of additive expected for the preset volume will be delivered before the down-
counter reaches the volume in System 805 – Additive Stop Amount.
Selections:
• [End of Batch] – Stop volume is ignored. Additive is delivered until end of batch
• No recalculation – Additive is delivered as above but injection halts when only stop volume remains
• Recalculation – Proper additive volume for entire preset volume is "squeezed" so that the correct additive amount for
preset is delivered when the stop volume is reached.
Note: See System 806: Additive Stop Volume Disable for those individual additives that deliver to the end of the batch.
Page 146 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None Range: [0] - 999

mon:Additive Stop Amount
System 804
Description: This four-digit entry allows the operator to select the amount of product remaining to be delivered when the
additive injectors will be shut down. This code is used only in conjunction with Injector Option 1 and 2 of parameter 803.
The range of this code is 0 to 9999
Note: See System 806: Additive Stop Volume Disable for those individual additives that deliver to the end of the batch.
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: System Range: 1 - 24

mon:Additive Stop Disable
System 098
Description: This parameter allows the programming of the additive stop volume to be ignored for specified additives.
Select the additives that will NOT be stopped at the additive stop volume by scrolling through the list on the AccuLoad
display.
Selections:
• Additive 1 - 24
Additives that will ignore the stop volume will be highlighted and a 'check mark' icon will appear on that additive in the list.

mon:Additive Stop Pump
Action
System 099
Description: This program code determines when the additive pump is de-energized while an additive stop amount is
configured and active for the associated injector.
Selections:
• [End of Batch]
• When Stop Amount reached (after last injection completes)
If the Additive Stop Disable option is configured for the associated injector, this option has no effect and the pump will remain
on until end of batch (default operation).
Note: This option cannot be guaranteed to give the desired results when used with smart injectors that perform their own
pump control.
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None Range: Text - 3 characters max.

mon:Additive Injection Units
System 805
Description: This code allows entry of a three-character identifier for the injected additive volume units, such as cc or oz.
These are the units associated with the programmed additive volume per injection in the recipe directory.
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None Range: Text - 3 characters max.

mon:Additive Totals Units
System 806
Description: This code allows entry of a three-character identifier for the injected additive volume units, such as cc or oz.
These are the units associated with the programmed additive volume per injection in the recipe directory.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 147


mon:Injection/Totalization
Conversion Factor
System 807
Description: This ten-digit numeric entry is used to convert injection units to totals units. The AccuLoad uses this formula for
the conversion:
Volume in Injector units / Conversion factor = Volume in Total Units
Example: If injection units are in cc., and injector totals are to be displayed in liters, the value would be 1000. (1.00 e+03).

mon:Clean Line Additive
0 disables alarm
System 808
Description: Sets the tolerance for the additive stop volume. If the batch is ended before the programmed stop volume
has been completely delivered, this entry determines if an alarm will occur. An alarm will occur at batch end if the volume
delivered since the last injection is short of the stop volume by more than this entry. A 0 entry disables the alarm.
Example: If injection units are in cc., and injector totals are to be displayed in liters, the value would be 1000. (1.00 e+03).

mon:Piston Injector Feedback
Errors 0 disables the alarm
System 809
Description: This one-digit numeric entry is used with piston injectors with feedback only. It defines the number of missed
feedback signals that can occur before an additive feedback alarm occurs. A 0 entry disables the alarm.

mon:Piston Injector Stop
Action
System 026
Description: This parameter determines whether any active piston injector outputs are de-energized if the batch is stopped
prematurely via the user interface, an alarm, or loss of permissive. This does not affect the state of the piston injector
solenoid output at batch end or transaction end.
Selections:
• [No Action]
• De-energize

mon:Alarm Pulse Count
System 087
Description: This parameter determines the threshold of leakage pulses allowed without an alarm. This parameter is for
metered injectors. When set to 0, the count defaults to 10.
Page 148 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: System Range: 0 - 999 minutes

mon:Alarm Pulse Time
System 088
Description: This parameter defines the amount of time in minutes between automatic resets of the Injector Alarm Pulse
Count. If set to 0, the count is not reset.
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: System Range: 0 - 999 sec

mon:Include Flow-Controlled Inj
Additive Totals
System 093
Description: Due to the large percentages and delivered amounts typically associated with flow-controlled additives,
these meters are typically custody transfer so they can be segregated/reported independently from the combined (product
+ additive) total usually reported when additives are plumbed downstream. Select whether to treat this flow-control additive
specially and NOT include the additive volume in the reported product total. Default is to include additive volumes in the
totals reported for the product.
Selections:
• [Include in Product]
• Not Included
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None Range:

mon:Flow Rate Controlled Inj Chan-
nel Select
System 142
Description: Selects single or dual channel pulse inputs for flow controlled additive meters.
Selections:
• [Single Channel]
• Dual Channel
Note: If the meter pulse input type in Configuration 101 - Transmitter Channel Selection is programmed for 0 – Single
Channel, then this program code must also be 0 – Single Channel.
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None Range: 0 - 999

mon:Flow Rate Controlled Inj Error
Count
System 143
Description: Sets the maximum number of dual pulse error counts allowed before a dual pulse error alarm occurs. The
count is maintained for each flow-controlled additive separately and the alarm is generated only if the error count for any
one injector pulse stream exceeds the error count programmed here. An entry of 0 disables the alarm.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 149

System:Additives:Additives Index: None Range:

Common: Flow Rate Controlled Inj
Pulse Error Reset
System 144
Description: This program code defines the conditions under which the dual pulse error count will be reset for the
flow-controlled additives.
Selections:
• [No Reset]
• Transaction End
• Power-Up
• Transaction & Power-Up
System:Additives:Additives Com- Index: None Range:

mon:Flow Rate Controlled Inj Error
Amount
System 145
Description: This program code determines if error pulses accumulated after a Pulse Security alarm occurs are counted
towards the flow-controlled additive amount delivered.
Note: Select ‘0 – Count’ to continue to totalize normally after this alarm occurs; Select ‘1 – Ignore’ to ignore all pulses after
an alarm occurs. Selecting ‘1 – Ignore’ will cause any volume or mass that actually flows through the meter from point where
this alarm occurs to when the valve is completely closed to be ignored. The AccuLoad will ignore any pulses from the meter
until the alarm is cleared.
Some measurement agencies require this behavior.
8.2.8.2 Additives Configuration Menu - Injector 1 - 24
System:Additives:Additives Config- Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range: Text - 10 characters maximum

uration:Injector Tag
System—See table below

Description: Enter a name for this injector
Page 150 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Additives:Additives Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range:

Configuration: Injector Type

Description: These program codes define the type of additive injector installed at that injector position. AccuLoad
supports a mixed implementation of additive injector types.
Selections:
• N/A
• Piston
• Piston Feedback
• Titan
• Blend-Pak
• Mini-Pak
• Smith Smart Injector
• Metered Injector
• Add-Pak-AICB
• Shared Injector 1
• Flow Rate Controlled Injector
• Add-Pak 2-Stroke injector
Critical: Metered injector pulse input not configured.
Critical: Injector I/O assignment does not match type
Critical: No comm port configured for smart additive control
Critical: No injector address assigned
Critical: Only four metered injectors may be configured
Critical: Add-Pak channel already assigned as auxiliary I/O point
Critical: Additive 1 must be a metered injector type to configure Shared Injector 1
Critical: Flow Rate Controlled Injectors limited to injectors 1-4
Critical: Flow Rate Controlled Injector pulse input not configured
System:Additives:Additives Config- Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range: 1 - 6

uration:Injector Arm
SSystem—See table below

Description: These entries specify the arm with which the associated additive injector is used.
Selections:
• Arm 1 - Arm 6
System:Additives:Additives Config- Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range:

uration:Injector Plumbing

Description: Selects which meters run(s) this injector is plumbed into.
Selections:
• Meter 1 - Meter 6
• Downstream (None)
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 151

System:Additives:Additives Config- Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range: 0 - 999

uration:Injector Address

Description: This three-digit numeric entry is used with any smart injector type. It defines the communications address for
the associated injector. When more than one injector is installed at AccuLoad, injector addresses must be unique.
Critical: Injector address must be unique.
Critical: If A4I Board #1 is present [determined by seeing if Injectors 5 through 14 are Add-Pak], then no injector may have
address 100 through 110.
Critical: If A4I Board #2 is present [determined by seeing if Injectors 15 through 24 are Add-Pak], then no injector may have
address 200 through 210.
Note: No entry if corresponding type is not a Smart Injector (Smith Meter, Titan, Gate City types).
Note: No entry if the injector is an Add-Pak type. If the injector is an Add-Pak type, this entry will be set automatically.
System:Additives:Additives Config- Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range: [0.000] - 9999.999

uration:Injector K Factor

Description: This seven-digit value defines the nominal number of pulses from a meter for one unit of registration.
Critical: Entry must not be zero.
Critical: Metered injector pulse input not configured.
System:Additives:Additives Config- Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range: [0.0000] - 9.9999

uration:Injector Meter Factor

Description: The meter factor for the additive meters that are being controlled directly by the AccuLoad are programmed in
these parameters. If the additives are being controlled through communications and ancillary equipment, no value should be
programmed in these parameters. Meter factor equals the actual volume times the current meter factor times the K factor, all
divided by the input pulses. The factory default is "0.0000".
Critical: Entry must not be zero.
Critical: Enter the meter factor for the metered injector.
System:Additives:Additives Con- Index: Injector 1 - 24 Range: [0] - 999.9

figuration:Metered Injector High
Tolerances

Description: These four-digit numeric entries define a percentage in three whole digits, followed by one decimal place, for
the amount the actual injected volume can surpass the average volume required to meet the additive needs. The factory
default is "0".
System:Additives:Additives Config- Index: Injector Range: [0] - 999.9

uration:Injector Low
Tolerances

Description: These four-digit numeric entries define a percentage in three whole digits, followed by one decimal place, for
the amount the actual injected volume can be under the average volume required to meet the additive needs. The factory
default is "0".
Page 152 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Additives:Additives Con- Index: Injector Range: [0] - 99

figuration:Injector Maximum Toler-
ance Errors

Description: These two-digit numeric entries allow the operator to set up how many times during the batch that the high and
low tolerance percentages can be exceeded continuously before an alarm is set. The factory default is "0".
INJ INJ Max

Additives: INJ INJ INJ High INJ Low
INJ Tag INJ Type INJ Arm INJ Add. Meter Tol.
Injectors Plumb. KFactor Toler. Toler.
Factor Errors
1 1800 810 811 812 882 906 907 908 909 910
2 1801 813 814 815 883 911 912 913 914 915
3 1802 816 817 818 884 916 917 918 919 920
4 1803 819 820 821 885 921 922 923 924 925
5 1804 822 823 824 886 926 927 928 929 930
6 1805 825 826 827 887 931 932 933 934 935
7 1806 828 829 830 888 936 937 938 939 940
8 1807 831 832 833 889 941 942 943 944 945
9 1808 834 835 836 890 946 947 948 949 950
10 1809 837 838 839 891 951 952 953 954 955
11 1810 840 841 842 892 956 957 958 959 960
12 1811 843 844 845 893 961 962 963 964 965
13 1812 846 847 848 894 966 967 968 969 970
14 1813 849 850 851 895 971 972 973 974 975
15 1814 852 853 854 896 976 977 978 979 980
16 1815 855 856 857 897 981 982 983 984 985
17 1816 858 859 860 898 986 987 988 989 990
18 1817 861 862 863 899 991 992 993 994 995
19 1818 864 865 866 900 996 997 998 999 000
20 1819 867 868 869 901 001 002 003 004 005
21 1820 870 871 872 902 006 007 008 009 010
22 1821 873 874 875 903 011 012 013 014 015
23 1822 876 877 878 904 016 017 018 019 020
24 1823 879 880 881 905 021 022 023 024 025
8.2.8.3 Flow Controlled Injector 1 - 4
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector 1 - 4 Range: 0 - 9999

Injector:Injector Minimum Flow

Description: This four-digit numeric entry defines the lowest programmed flow rate for the additive. This will be the final
stage flow rate for the additive when the valve is signaled to close at the completion of a preset. The range of this entry is 0
to 9999 units per time measurement.

Injector:Injector Maximum Flow

Description: This four-digit numeric entry defines the maximum flow rate being controlled for this additive during loading.
The range of this entry is front 0 to 9999 flow units.
Example: Current Flow Rate: 130 GPM Flow Tolerance: ±5%
Flow rate may vary ±6.5 GPM (130 GPM × 5% = 6.5 GPM without a valve correction)
Note: Additive will not flow if additive maximum flow is zero.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 153


Injector:Injector Flow Tolerance

Description: This single-digit entry designates the percentage of the currently requested flow rate that the flow rate of the
additive may vary before the AccuLoad initiates a valve correction. The range of this one-digit numeric entry is from 0 to 9%.
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector 1 - 4 Range: 0 - 99.9

Injector:Injector 2nd Trip

Description: This three-digit numeric entry defines the preset amount in tenths remaining for this additive at the final valve
closure signal for the product. The range of this entry is from 0.0 to 99.9 units.
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector 1 - 4 Range:

Injector:Injector Valve Type

Description: This entry defines the type of valve to be used with this additive.
Selections:
• Digital
• Analog

Injector:Analog Valve Kp (PID,
Proportional Gain Factor)

Description: This entry defines the PID proportional gain factor for analog valve control. The range of this entry is 0.000 to
999.999. This entry is used only with analog valves.

Injector:Analog Valve Ki (PID,
Integral Gain Factor)

Description: This entry defines the PID integral gain factor for analog valve control. The range of this entry is 0.000 to

Injector:Additive Kd (PID,
Derivative Gain Factor)

Description: This entry defines the PID derivative gain factor for analog valve control. The range of this entry is 0.000 to
Page 154 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)


Injector:Analog Valve PID Interval

Description: This entry defines the time interval, in seconds, between PID calculations. The range of this entry is 0.0 to 9.9.

Injector:Additive API Table

Description: This entry allows the operator to select the appropriate calculation to be used to temperature compensate
the additive. This parameter applies only when the injector is configured as a flow rate controlled injector with temperature
compensation.
Selections:
• None
• API 2004 - crude oils
• API 2004 - refined products
• API 2004 - C tables special
• API 2004 - Lube Oils
• API E Tables - LPG, NGL
• API 1952 (6,23,24,53,54)
• PTB-1 - Ethanol/Bio Blend
• PTB-3 - Ethanol/Bio Blend
• EPA-RFS2 (E100)
• EPA-RFS2 (B100)
• Aromatics (ASTM D1555)
• Brazil ABNT5992 (RefDen)
• Brazil ABNT5992 (RefGrade)
• Brazil ABNT5992 (LiveDen)
• Brazil BR1A
• Brazil BR1P
• Brazil BR2P
• NH3 - Ammonia
Critical: This API table not available for flow controlled injectors. [Odd-numbered API tables, Brazil tables and 24E]
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector 1 - 4 Range: -9999.9 – +9999.9

Injector:Additive Reference Density

Description: This code has a constant five-digit entry with a floating decimal point. The format is based on table and product
selection. The program code format and data entry allows the programmable entry of the Reference Density when Table 54
is selected, Relative Density when Table 24 is selected, API when Table 6 is selected, and temperature coefficient when a C
Table is selected. This entry represents the reference value used to calculate the volume correction factor. The range of this
value will vary with the table selection chosen.
Note: When Table 6 is selected, the leading digit will be used to show polarity, + = positive and a - = negative.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 155


Injector:Reference Density Units

Description: This entry allows the operator to indicate whether an additive is to share a temperature probe already
assigned to another arm / meter or additive, and to select a specific probe to be shared. This eliminates having to
configure multiple analog inputs for temperature.
Selections:
• NA
• API
• Lb/Ft3 (Pounds/Cubic Feet)
• Kg/M3 (Kilograms/Cubic Meter)

Injector:Additive Shared Tempera-
ture

Description: This entry allows the operator to indicate whether an additive is to share a temperature probe already
assigned to another arm / meter or additive, and to select a specific probe to be shared. This eliminates having to
configure multiple analog inputs for temperature.
Selections:
• Not Used
• Arm 1 Meter 1 – 6
• Flow Rate Injector 1 – 4
Critical: Temperature probe already assigned to additive.
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector 1 - 4 Range: -999.9 – +999.9

Injector:Additive Maintenance
Temperature

Description: This code allows the entry of a maintenance temperature to be used when a temperature probe is not installed
or working, but temperature related calculations are desired. The temperature units are dependent on the entry made in
the Temperature Scale Select code. This four-digit entry has a range of –999.9 to 999.9 temperature units where –999.9
disables the maintenance temperature.
Note: An entry greater than -999.9 will override the temperature probe or transducer input if installed and will be used in all
calculations where temperature is used. Note: This feature may be disallowed in certain weights and measures jurisdictions.
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector Flow 1 - 4 Range: -999.9 – +999.9

Injector:Additive High
Temperature Alarm Limit

Description: This code allows the entry of a temperature reading that will cause a high temperature alarm to be generated.
The temperature units will be dependent on the entry made in the Temperature Scale Select code. This four-digit entry has a
range of –999.9 to +999.9 degrees F or C.
Note: An entry of "+999" will disable the alarm.
Page 156 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector Flow 1 - 4 Range: -999.9 — +999.9

Injector:Additive Low Temperature
Alarm Limit

Description: This code allows the entry of a temperature reading that will cause a low temperature alarm to be generated.
The temperature units will be dependent on the entry made in the Temperature Scale Select code. This four-digit entry has a
range of -999.9 to +999.9 °F or °C.
Note: “999” will disable the alarm.
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector Flow 1 - 4 Range: 0 - 9999

Injector:Injector Flow Timeout

Description: This parameter determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed to reach the desired rate for a
flow rate controlled additive before an alarm will be issued. If the desired flow is not reached before this timeout expires a
low additive alarm will occur. A zero entry disables the feature.
Help: Enter time in seconds to reach desired flow rate before an alarm occurs. Zero disables.
System:Additives:Flow Controlled Index: Injector Flow 1 - 4 Range: 0 - 9999

Injector:Rate Cutoff

Description: This parameter defines the additive flow rate below which dual pulse errors will not be counted. Entry is
volume or mass based upon System 305 – Pulse In Type. The range of this entry is 0-9999.
This parameter has no effect if flow controlled additive pulse inputs are not configured for dual channel transmitters in
System 836 – Flow Controlled Additive Channel Select.
Injector Flow Control Injector 1 Injector 2 Injector 3 Injector 4

Min Flow 027 031 035 039
Max Flow 028 032 036 040
Flow Tolerance 029 033 037 041
Inj. 2nd trip 030 034 038 042
Inj. Valve type 043 048 053 058
Analog Valve Kp 044 049 054 059
Analog Valve Ki 045 050 055 060
Analog Valve Kd 046 051 056 061
Analog Valve PID
047 052 057 062
Interval
Additive API Table 063 069 075 081
Additive Ref. Density 064 070 076 082
Ref Density Units *1824 *1825 *1826 *1827
Additive Share Temp 065 071 077 083
Additive Maint. Temp 066 072 078 084
Additive Hi Temp Alarm 067 073 079 085
Additive Low Temp
068 074 080 086
Alarm
Flow timeout 089 090 091 092
Rate Cutoff 094 095 096 097
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 157
8.2.9 900—Security Directory
System:Security:Access Codes Index: Security Range: 0000 - 9999

Level 1 - 5
Description: These four-digit numbers permit entry into the AccuLoad's program or Weights and Measures program codes.
The access codes must be entered through the AccuLoad IV user interface after the Program Mode security contact has
been closed (if the optional security switch input feature has been programmed and wired to a switch). If this contact has
not been closed, the AccuLoad IV will not allow entry into the Program Mode. Once the security is set up for the parameters
in the unit the operator must enter the program mode at the level assigned to the parameter(s) that are to be changed. The
range of these entries is from 0 to 9999.
Critical (s):
• Duplicate access codes are not permitted
• Must be at highest level of security
• A Level 5 access code must be entered at a minimum to utilize this feature.
Note (s):
• A Level 5 access code must be entered at a minimum to utilize this feature.
• The operator must enter Program Mode at the highest programmed security level to obtain access to these access codes.
System:Security:Security Input 1 Index: None Range: 1 - 43
System 1900
Description: Select the digital input to use for the Security Input #1 function.
Selections:
• No Security Input
• Digital Input 1 - 43
System 1901
Description: Select the digital input to use for the Security Input #2 function.
Selections:
• No Security Input
• Digital Input 1 - 43

Level
System 156
Description: This entry selects the security level associated with Security Input #1. Access up to this level will be available
with the activation of this input (and passcode if configured).
Selections:
• No Security
• Security Level 1 - 5
Page 158 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)


Level
System 157
Description: This entry selects the security level associated with Security Input #2. Access up to this level will be available
with the activation of this input (and passcode if configured).
Selections:
• No Security
System:Security:Diagnostics Security Index: None Range: 1 - 5

Level
System 158
Description: This entry selects the level of security required to enter the diagnostics menu.
Selections:
• No Security
System:Security:Set Parameter Index: None Range: 1 - 5

Security
Description: Used to set the security of all configuration database parameters to the specified level
8.3 Bay Directories

8.3.1 100—General Purpose Bay Directories
Bay 1-2
• Bay Permissive 1 Sense

• Bay Permissive 1 Message
• Bay Permissive 1 Restart
• Bay Permissive 2 Sense
• Bay Permissive 2 Message
• Bay Permissive 2 Restart
• Bay ID
• Report Select
• Summary Report Print Time
• Summary Report Interval
• Report Totals Resolution
• Report Pages
• Report HM Class
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 159

Bays:Bay Permissive 1 Sense Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range: 1 - 2
Bays: 101, 104

Description: Enables and defines the conditions under which a bay permissive is expected to be present in order for load-
ing operations to be allowed. Bay permissives affect all arms currently assigned to (or in the case of swing arms, positioned
on) that bay
Selections:
• [N/A] - Permissive is disabled
• Transaction Start - Permissive input is only checked immediately after authorization
• Continuous - Permissive input must be asserted continuously during the batch
• Start Pressed - Permissive input must be asserted whenever flow is started
Batch Start - Permissive input must be asserted to start a batch
Bays:Bay Permissive Messages Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range: 1 - 2

28 character maximum
Bays 102, 105
Description: These 28 character alphanumeric messages will be displayed if a permissive sense entry, corresponding with
the message is defined but not present when expected. The data entry allows 28 character maximum.
Bays:Bay Permissive Restart Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range: 1 - 2
Bays 103, 106

Description: These parameters will determine how a restart is mediated after a permissive is lost ant then restored.
Selections:
• Manual – Start button must be pressed to restore
• Automatic – Flow will be started automatically as soon as the permissive is restored.
Bays:Bay ID Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range: Text - 28-character max.
Bays 107
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter or edit a 28-character bay identification. The ID is used on default
reports and is available for configurable reports.
8.3.2 700—Communications Bay Directories
Bays:Report Select Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range:
Bays 701
Description: This program code defines which delivery report will be printed at the completion of a transaction on the bay if
a printer function is assigned to one or more communications ports. The same report will be printed at each port if multiple
ports are configured for printer options.
Selections:
• Default
• User Config 1
• User Config 2
Page 160 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Bays:Summary Report Print Time Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range: Text - 6-character max.
Bays 702
Description: This entry defines the initial time at which the AccuLoad will generate the summary report for the bay. This
report summarizes all transaction data on the bay for the interval defined in the Summary Report Interval parameter.
Bays:Summary Report Interval Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range: 0 - 999
Bays 703
Description: This entry defines the interval of time covered by the Summary Report. Used in conjunction with the Summary
Report Print Time, a new report is generated at the interval specified in this program code. The range of this entry is 0 – 999
hours. If set to zero, the summary report is disabled.
Bays:Report Totals Resolution Index: Bays 1 and 2
Bays 704
Description: This entry selects the amount resolution to print on default reports. There are three available options.
Selections:
• Whole
• 10ths
• 100ths
Bays:Report Pages Index: Bays 1 and 2
Bays 705
Description: This entry selects which pages will be printed on reports. There are four available options.
Selections:
• Batch and Transaction
• Batch Only
• Transaction Only
• No Report
Bays:Report HM Class Index: Bays 1 and 2 Range: 1 - 6
Bays 706
Description: This entry allows the operator to select which product's Hazardous Materials (HM) Classification will be printed
on the summary page of the report.
Selections:
• Arm 1 - 6
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 161

8.4 Arms Directories
Arm 1-6
• 100—General Purpose
• 200—Flow Control
• 300—Volume Accuracy
• 700—Communications
• Meter directories for this arm
• Product directories for this arm
8.4.1 100—General Purpose Directory
Arms:General Purpose:Permissive 1, 2 Index: Arm Permissive (1-2) Range:

Sense
Arms 101, 104

Description: Defines the states when permissive inputs are required to allow loading operations.
Selections:
• N/A
• Transaction Start – Permissive only checked immediately after authorization
• Continuous – Permissive must be met continuously during the batch
• Start Pressed – Permissive must be met whenever flow is started
• Batch Start – Permissive must be met to start a batch
Arms:General Purpose:Permissive 1, 2 Index: Arm Permissive (1-2) Range: Text - 28 Characters

Message
Arms 102, 105

Description: Messages displayed if the permissive input corresponding with the message, is defined but not present when
expected.
Arms:General Purpose:Permissive 1, 2 Index: Arm Permissive (1-2) Range:

Restart
Arms 103, 106

Description: Determines how a restart is initiated after a permissive is lost and then restored.
Selections:
• Manual – Start must be pressed to restore flow
• Automatic – Flow will be started automatically as soon as the permissive is restored
Arms:General Purpose:Load Arm ID Index: Arm Range: Text - 28 Characters
Arms 107
Description: Used to identify the load position. It is included on the AccuLoad's display in Ready mode. The Load Arm ID
can also be included on the delivery report.
Page 162 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arm: General Purpose: Ready Message Index: Arm Range: Text - 28 Characters
Arms 108
Description: Enter the message to be displayed for the arm when it is idle (at the Ready screen).
Arms:General Purpose:Bay Index: Arm Range:

Assignment
Arms 109
Description: Allows the operator to assign a load arm to a bay.
Selections:
• Independent
• Bay A
• Bay B
• Swing Arm
Arms:General Purpose:Unlimited Index: Arm Range:

Preset
Arms 111
Description: Enables an alternative method of product delivery for specialized applications where the goal is to continu-
ously blend two or more products. This feature can optionally also be used in situations where a main product stream is not
under the control of the AccuLoad but component products being blended into the main product ARE being controlled by the
AccuLoad (wild stream blending).
When configured for unlimited preset with a wild stream meter, the desired flow rates will not be based on a programmed
high flow rate or low flow start rate. Instead the desired flow rate for the controlled products will be based on the flow rate of
the wild stream. The AccuLoad will attempt to adjust the flow rates for the controlled products to produce the programmed
blend ratio.
If all products are controlled (no wild stream meter), the desired flow rates will be based on the programmed high flow rate or
low flow rate. In this configuration, the high flow rate will not be exceeded.
Selections:
• No
• Yes
Arms:General Purpose:Transaction Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999 hours

Reset Time
0 to disable
Arms 112
Description: The time period between automatic resetting of the current transaction in Unlimited Preset mode. The current
transaction will be terminated and a new transaction will be started when the period expires. Only affects and is only avail-
able with arms configured for Unlimited Preset.
Arms:General Purpose:Transaction Index: Arm Range: 0 - 23

Reset Start Hour
Arms 113
Description: Specifies the hour of the day when the transaction reset period begins.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 163

• Low Flow Start Rate

• Low Flow Start Amount
• Low Flow Start Percentage
• Low Flow Start Condition
• High Flow Rate
• 2nd High Flow Rate
• 1st/2nd High Flow
• 1st/2nd High Flow Preset
• Start/Stop Delay
• Overrun Alarm Limit
• Zero Flow Timer
• Valve Delay to Open
• Pump Delay to Off
• Valve Fault Timeout
• Clean Line Amount
• Clean Line Product
• Clean Line Alarm Limit
Arms:Flow Control:Low Flow Start Index: Arm Range: 0.0 - 9999.9

Rate
Arms 201
Description: Designates the flow rate used during low flow start, i.e., for the volume of product defined by the low flow start
volume or low flow start percentage parameters.
Critical: Low flow start rate can't be less than the minimum flow rate (checks all products configured).
Arms:Flow Control:Low Flow Start Index: Arm Range: 0.0 - 9999.9

Amount
Arms 202
Description: Defines the amount of product to be delivered at the low flow start rate. If both low flow start amount and low
flow start percentage are defined, the larger of the two will be used for low flow start.
Arms:Flow Control:Low Flow Start Index: Arm Range: 0 - 99

Percentage
Arms 203
Description: Defines the percentage of the preset volume to be delivered during low flow start. If both low flow start per-
centage and low flow start volume are defined, the larger of the two will be used for low flow start.
Arms:Flow Control: Low Flow Start Index: Arm Range:

Condition
Arms 204
Description: Selects if the low flow start should be performed only at the start of a delivery or every time flow starts.
Selections:
• Always
• Start of batch
Page 164 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Flow Control:High Flow Rate Index: Arm Range: 1 - 99999
Arms 205
Description: For ratio blending arms, this rate will be divided among the products being delivered according to the percent-
ages assigned in the recipe selected for loading. For other arm types, the high flow rate is set per product.
Note: "00000" will not allow the valve to open.
Note: This parameter is only used for ratio blending.
Arms:Flow Control:2nd High Flow Index: Arm Range: 0 - 99999

Rate
Arms 206
Description: For ratio blending arms, sets a second high flow rate which is selectable by a digital input. This flow rate would
be typically selected for smaller trucks.
Note: This parameter is only used for ratio blending.
Arms:Flow Control:1st/2nd High Index: Arm Range:

Flow
Arms 232
Description:
Selects when the 1st/2nd High Flow input is monitored as follows:
If Batch Start is selected, the high flow rate used for the delivery will be based on the state of the input at the start of the
batch and subsequent changes in the input will be ignored. .
If the Dynamic option is used, the AccuLoad will continuously adjust the high flow rate based on the state of this input during
the high flow portion of the batch. If the batch has already reached 1st trip, the flow rate will only be reduced by a change in
state of the 1st/2nd high flow digital input.
• Batch Start
• Dynamic
Arms:Flow Control:First/Second Index: Arm Range: [0] – 999999

High Flow Preset Disable: 0
Arms 229
Description: Preset amounts above this value will deliver at the first or standard high flow rates programmed. Presets less
than this amount will deliver at the second high flow rate (as if the second high flow switch input had been activated). Any
batch with a preset amount less than or equal to this entry will use the rates programmed in Product 203 – Second High
Flow Rate and Load Arm 206 – Second High Flow Rate in place of the rates programmed in Product 202 – High Flow Rate
and Load Arm 205 – High Flow Rate. This program code does not require nor preclude the use of a first/second high flow
switch. The second high flow rate will be used if either the second high flow switch is active or the preset amount is at or
below the value in this entry. An entry of 0 disables the feature. The range of this entry is units.
Note: The load arm high flow rate values only apply to ratio blending arms.
Arms:Flow Control:Start Stop Delay Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999 seconds
Arms 207
Description: Sets the number of seconds delay before allowing flow to be re-started after flow was stopped during a batch.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 165

Arm:Flow Control:Overrun Alarm Index: Arm Range: 0 - 99 units delivered

Limit
Arms 208
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for product delivered in excess of the preset amount.
Arm:Flow Control:Zero Flow Timer Index: Arm Range: 0 - 99.9 seconds

Disable: 0
Arms 209
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the amount of time the AccuLoad will wait for flow to begin after opening the flow
control valve. Once this alarm occurs, the flow control valve will be commanded closed. The alarm must be cleared prior to
attempting to restart flow.
Arms:Flow Control:Valve Delay to Index: Arm Range: 0 - 99 seconds

Open
Arms 210
Description: Sets the amount of time between asserting the pump control signal and opening the flow control valve. This
can be used to allow the pump to pressurize the line, providing for better valve response.
Arms:Flow Control:Pump Delay to Index: Arm Range: [0] - 99 seconds

Off
Arms 211
Description: Sets a time delay between flow stop and de-asserting the pump control signal. Upon a normal or
operator-requested stop, the pump output will remain active for this delay before turning off. Alarm shutdown will
not be delayed; the pump output will be turned off immediately.
Arms:Flow Control:Valve Fault Index: Arm Range: [0] - 99 Seconds

Timeout Disable: 0
Arms 212
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the amount of time that the AccuLoad will ignore flow after the valve has been
commanded to close. If flow persists beyond this time, a "Valve Fault" alarm will occur.
Arms:Flow Control:Valve Fault Index: Arm Range: [0] - 99 Delivery units

Amount Disable: 0
Arms 213
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the amount of flow that the AccuLoad will ignore after the valve has been
commanded to close. If flow exceeds this amount, a "Valve Fault" alarm will occur.
Arms:Flow Control:Clean Line Index: Arm Range: [0] - 999 Delivery units
Amount
Arms 221
Description: Specifies the amount of clean line flush product to be delivered to fill the pipe/load arm at the end of every
batch. This amount is determined by calculating the amount of product to fill the pipe/load arm from the control valve(s) to
the end of the loading arm.
Page 166 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Flow Control: Clean Line Product Index: Arm Range: 1 - 6

Default: Product 1
Arms 222
Description: Selects the product that will be used as the clean line product. The clean line product will be delivered at the
end of every batch whether the designated clean line product is part of the recipe being delivered or not. The purpose is to
have the line packed with the clean line product at the end of a delivery.
Critical: Clean line product must be Product 1 when configured for side-stream blending.
Flow Control: Clean Line Alarm Index: Arm Range: 0 - 99 Delivery units
Limit
Arms 223
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the number of delivery units that the clean line amount can fall short of the pro-
grammed amount before causing an alarm. For example, if the clean line amount is set for 100 gallons and the maximum
clean line alarm limit is programmed for 5 gallons, the clean line amount can range between 95 gallons and 100 gallons
without causing an alarm.
Arms:Flow Control:Clean Line Index: Arm Range:

Blend
Arms 230
Description: When a clean line product is used, it will be the first portion of the next delivery which can cause the blend to
be out of tolerance initially. If this parameter is enabled, the control valve for the clean line product will not be opened at the
start of the batch, to reduce the time to get the blend corrected.
Selections:
• No
• Yes
Note: Applies only to ratio blending arms.
Arms:Flow Control:Ratio Factor Index: Arm Range: 0.1 - 99.9

Adjust Default: 0.0
Arms 224
Description: Sets the ratio adjustment factor used to adjust the response of the blend valves to help maintain the
programmed blend ratio during loading. This factor is used to magnify the difference between the programmed blend
ratio and the current blend ratio so that the programmed blend ratio can be achieved more quickly.
Arms:Flow Control:Ratio Factor Index: Arm Range: 01 - [10] - 99 Seconds

Time
Arms 225
Description: Sets the time in seconds between flow rate calculations based on programmed and current blend ratios. If this
results in a desired flow rate outside the tolerance of the current flow rate, then the control valves will be adjusted. This value
should be determined based on the hydraulic conditions that exist for the system.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 167

Arms:Flow Control: Block Valve Index: Arm Range: [0] - 3

Position Default: 0
Arms 226
Description: For sequential blending arms this entry selects the position of the block valve at the end of a transaction and
when the STOP button is pressed. The valve can either be left open (for relief of thermal expansion) or closed. This code
applies only to electric motor-operated valves.
Selections:
• 0 - Valve is closed when STOP is pressed and at the end of the transaction
• 1 - Valve is open when STOP is pressed and closed at the end of the transaction
• 2 - Valve is closed when STOP is pressed and open at the end of the transaction
• 3 - Valve is open when STOP is pressed and open at the end of the transaction.
Note: Applies to sequential blending only.
Arms:Flow Control:Valve Close Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999 Seconds

Delay
Arms 228
Description: For unloading arms. This parameter determines the amount of time in seconds the valve will remain open after
the stop switch input is de-asserted. This prevents the valve from closing during the period when the gear pump may be
engaged.
Arms:Flow Control:Additive Stop Index: Arm Range: [0] - 9999

Amount
Arms 227
Description: This program code allows an arm-specific additive stop quantity (in delivery units) to be specified. If a nonzero
value is programmed both here and in System 805 – Additive Stop Amount, this value supersedes the system value.
Help: Enter load arm preset amount left to be delivered before injector shutdown (in preset type)
Arm:Flow Control: Additive Low Index: Arm Range:

Flow Start
Arms 231
Description: This program code determines when additive pacing begins.
Selections:
• Batch Start - Additive pacing begins immediately at the start of the batch
• After Low Flow - Additive pacing begins after Low Flow start volume has been delivered
This option allows for a delay between additive pump startup and first injection to assure sufficient pressure has been
established in the additive system.
Critical: Low flow start condition must be “Batch Start.”
Note: Feature is not available for flow controlled additives.
Page 168 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Index: Arm Range: 0.0 % - 9.9 % [1.0]

Tolerance (Percentage)
Arms 301
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for blend error as a percentage of the total batch. If the delivered amount of each
product is within plus or minus the blend percentage of the total delivery, no blend alarm will occur.
For example, assume a blend tolerance of 2%, a preset of 1000 gallons, and a recipe consisting of four products with each
making up 25% (250 gal)of the total. If 1000 gallons are delivered, the blend tolerance would be 20 gallons (2% of 1000 gal-
lons). If any product delivered less than 230 gallons (250 – 20) a blend low alarm will be set. If any product delivered more
than 270 gallons (250 + 20), a blend high alarm will be set. (This is true only if all 1000 gallons are delivered.)
Note: A blend tolerance entry of zero allows no tolerance, causing an alarm to occur unless all components are delivered
exactly.
Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Index: Arm Range: 0.1 - 99.9 delivery units

Tolerance (Amount)
Arms 302
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for blend error as a fixed volume. This volume represents the maximum delivered
volume of each product in the blend over or under the target volume that will be allowed by AccuLoad without causing an
alarm. The range of this entry is 00.1 to 99.9 units.
Note: If both a blend tolerance volume and a blend tolerance percentage are entered, the AccuLoad will use the larger of
the two for a specific batch. It is recommended that the volume tolerance be programmed here to override the percentage
for very small batches to reduce nuisance alarms.
Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Index: Arm Range:

Correction Default: No Blend Correction
Arms 303
Description: Sets the type of Blend Correction on a sequential load arm, that will be allowed in case of a product overrun.
Three possible selections are available.
Selections:
• [No Blend Correction]. If a product overrun occurs during the loading process, which would cause a blend alarm, no cor-
rection will be allowed and the transaction must be ended.
• Self-Corrected Blend. If a product overrun occurs during the loading process, the AccuLoad will automatically try to cor-
rect the blend if the product in error is being loaded as another component of the blend (i.e., error in component 2 – Regular,
Regular also being loaded as component 5). If the component in error is not repeated as one of the components that has not
been loaded, the transaction will have to be ended.
• Self-Corrected Blend/Complete Batch. If a product overrun occurs during the loading process, the AccuLoad IV will
automatically try to correct the blend if the product in error is being loaded as another component of the blend. If the compo-
nent in error is not repeated as one of the components that has not been loaded, the driver/operator will have the choice of
ending the batch or completing the loading of the original preset amount.
Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999 Seconds

Alarm Timeout
Arms 304
Description: For "Unlimited Preset" arms and arms using the timed blend algorithm this sets the alarm threshold for the
amount of time an "out of tolerance" blend condition can exist. The blend tolerance is determined by the values in both
Load Arm 301 - Blend Tolerance Percentage and in Load Arm 302 - Blend Tolerance Amount. Both tolerance limits must be
exceeded before the AccuLoad begins the out-of-tolerance condition timer.
Note: A zero value will result in an immediate alarm if the blend goes out of tolerance.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 169

Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Index: Arm Range: 0 - 9999 delivery units

Alarm Minimum Amount
Arms 305
Description: For unlimited preset arms and arms using the timed blend algorithm, this program code inhibits the blend
tolerance alarm checking at batch start until this amount has been delivered. In unlimited preset arms, this volume or mass
allows time for the blend stream to catch up with wild stream. For arms using the timed blend algorithm, this is used to
suppress blend tolerance checking until after low flow start is completed if the blend makes impossible to maintain blend
during low flow start.
Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999.99 delivery units

Correction Amount
Arms 306
Description: Sets the deadband for the deviation from the target blend that is allowed before the AccuLoad attempts
to adjust/correct the blend on an Unlimited Preset or timed blend algorithm arm (in order to prevent continuous valve
adjustment). If this amount is exceeded, the AccuLoad will attempt to adjust the flow rate of the products such that the
blend will be on spec within the time specified in Load Arm 307 - Blend Correction Time.
Arms:Volume Accuracy: Blend Index: Arm Range: 1 - 999 seconds

Correction Time
Arms 307
Description: This program code determines how quickly the AccuLoad attempts to bring the blend percentage of an
Unlimited Preset or timed blend algorithm arm back to ideal conditions once the deviation from the desired percentages
exceeds the value in Load Arm 306 - Blend Correction Amount.
Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Error Index: Arm Range:

Reset
Arms 308
Description: This program code determines at what points the accumulated blend errors are reset to 0 when an arm is
configured for Unlimited Preset operation.
Selections:
• Batch Start
• Blend Alarm Cleared
• Batch Start and Alarm
• No Reset
Arms:Volume Accuracy:Blend Index: Arm Range:

Algorithm
Arms 309
Description: This program code determines which algorithm will be used for ratio blend applications. The “Ratio Adj
Factor” is the traditional ratio blend method and uses the ratio adjust factor to control how quickly the blend is corrected.
The “Timed” blend algorithm will attempt to correct the blend within a programmable amount of time. The “Timed” blend
algorithm is independent of batch size and therefore works best when batch sizes can vary significantly. The “Timed”
blend algorithm will also make blend corrections during low flow start. This parameter can also be used for an unlimited
preset arm.
Page 170 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Volume Accuracy:Ratio Index: Arm Range:

Product Minimum Flow
Arms 310
Description:
Selections:
• Maintain min rate
• Allow valve to close
Critical: Option available with Timed Blend Algorithm only.
Factory Default: "Maintain min rate" (lowest flow rate allowed will be the programmed minimum flow rate – Product 201).
Arms:Volume Accuracy:Minimum Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999 seconds

Valve Close Time
Arms 311
Critical: Option available only with "allow valve to close" option selected in Arm 321 - Ratio Product Minimum Flow.
Note: If zero is entered, then the valve will be allowed to open and close as often as necessary to maintain blend.
8.4.4 700—Communications Directory
Arms:Communications:Report Index: Arm Range:

Selection
Arms 701
Description: This program code defines which delivery report will be printed at the completion of a transaction.
Selections:
• Default
• User Configured Report 1 and 2
Note: Default Report – see appendix IV
Note: The user-configured reports are designed on the AccuMate and downloaded to the AccuLoad.
Note: Even if a user-configured report has been downloaded from the AccuMate to the AccuLoad, it will not be printed
unless it is selected here. If a user-configured report is selected but none has been downloaded, no report will print.
Note: The same report will be printed at each port if multiple ports are configured for printer options.
Arms:Communications:Summary Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999

Report Print Time
Arms 702
Description: Sets the initial print time of the summary report. Enter the hours, minutes, and time type (AM, PM, or military)
the summary report is to be printed. The summary report includes a line per batch for all transactions run during the time
interval specified.
Fatal: Invalid time entry
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 171

Arms:Communications:Summary Index: Arm Range: 0 - 999 hours

Report Interval Disable: 0
Arms 703
Description: Sets the number of hours between printings of the summary report. Once the time of the report has been set
using the Summary Report Print Time parameter, the report will automatically print each interval starting from that time.

Totals Resolution
Arms 704
Description: This entry selects the volume resolution to print on default reports.
Selections:
• Whole units
• Tenths
• Hundredths

Pages Default: Batch and Transaction Pages
Arms 705
Description: Selects which pages will be printed on reports. The default report for a straight product load arm consists of a
single page report with both batch and transaction data on that page.
Selections:
• [Batch and transaction pages] – one page per batch plus a summary page for the transaction
• Batch page only – one page per batch only; no transaction summary
• Transaction page only – transaction summary only; no batch details
• No transaction report – printer only used for summary reports
Arms:Communications:Report HM Index: Arm Range: 1 - 6

Classification
Arms 706
Description: Selects which products' HM Classification message will be printed on the transaction summary page of the
default transaction report.
• Product 1 - 6
Arms:Communications:Arm Tag ID Index: Arm Range: Text 8 characters max.
Arms 710
Description: This parameter is used to enter a unique tag name for the load arm. Enter up to 8 characters of text.
Page 172 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.5 Meter Directories

200—Flow Control Directory
300—Volume Accuracy Directory
400—Temperature/Density Directory
500—Pressure Directory
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Meter Tag Index: Arm Range: Text 20 characters max.
Meter 1000
Description: This parameter is used to enter a unique tag name for the meter.
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Valve Index: Meter Range:

Type Default: Digital
Meter 201
Description: This parameter selects the type of control valve used by AccuLoad IV.
Selections:
• [Digital]
• Two-Stage
• Analog
• Wild Stream
Critical: Two-stage valve not allowed with ratio blending
Critical: No analog valve output configured
Critical: Upstream/downstream solenoids required
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Analog Index: Meter Range: 0.000 - 999.999

Valve (Kp)
Meter 202
Description: This three-digit entry is the PID proportional gain factor for analog valve control. The range of this entry is from
(used only with analog valves).
Note: This entry is used only with analog valves

Valve Ki
Meter 203
Description: This three-digit entry is the PID integral gain factor for analog valve control.
Note: This entry is used only with analog valves.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 173


Valve Kd
Meter 204
Description: This three-digit entry is the PID derivative gain factor for analog valve control. (It is used only with analog
valves.)
Note: This entry is used only with analog valves
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Analog Index: Meter Range: 0.0 - 99

Valve PID Interval
Meter 205
Description: Sets the time interval in seconds between PID calculations.
Note: This entry is used only with analog valves.
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Zero Flow Index: Meter Range: [0] - 99 seconds

Alarm Timer Disable: 0
Meter 206
Description: For ratio blending arms, sets the alarm threshold for the maximum time the AccuLoad will allow between
commanding the flow control valve open and the start of flow. An entry of zero causes AccuLoad IV to disable the zero flow
alarm.
Note: No entry if not a ratio blender. Use the arm zero flow timer for other arm types.
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Overrun Index: Meter Range: [0] - 99 delivery units

Alarm Limit Disable: 0
Meter 207
Description: For ratio blending arms, this sets the alarm threshold for the number of delivery units that may be delivered in
excess of the target amount before an alarm occurs.
Note: This parameter only applies to ratio blender arms, for other arm types use the arm overrun alarm limit parameter.
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Flow Index: Meter Range: 0 to 9.9%

Adjust Tolerance
Meter 208
Description: Set the dead band tolerance used on ratio blending arms when making flow rate adjustments. This is intended
as a tighter flow tolerance than in Product 204. This tolerance is only applied when the flow rate has been adjusted (from low
flow to high flow, to improve the blend). The purpose of the tighter tolerance is to closely match the desired flow rate. Note
that this tight tolerance is only in effect for the time specified in the following parameter. For a desired flow rate Q, the
tolerance band is defined as Q +/- (Q * t) where t is the percentage entered for this tolerance.
Note: Applies only to ratio blender arms.
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Flow Index: Meter Range: 0.0 - 99.9 seconds

Adjust Timer
Meter 209
Description: Sets the time in seconds for the flow rate adjustment tolerance to be in effect.
Note: Applies only to ratio blending arms.
Page 174 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Meter Index: Meter Range:

Plumbing
Meter 210
Description: This entry defines the plumbing of a minor product meter for a hybrid blending arm.
Selections:
• Ratio (downstream of the main product meter)
• Side Stream (upstream of the main product meter)
If the ratio product is plumbed side stream it can share the same temperature probe and densitometer as the sequential
product if desired.
This entry is used for hybrid blending arms only; it is not used for any other arm types.
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Ramp Index: Meter Range: [0] - 99%

Down Tolerance (Q1) Disable: 0
Meter 211
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for flow rate error during the first stage of the end-of-batch ramp down and is used
to predict a valve fault condition as the batch ends. If during the first stage of the end-of-batch ramp down, the flow rate is
not decreasing within the percentage entered for this parameter, a "PO: Predict Overrun" alarm will occur which will stop the
batch and turn the pump off. Note this tolerance should be greater than the programmed product flow tolerance % (Product
204) and needs to be large enough to allow for normal flow rate fluctuations during ramp down otherwise false alarms may
occur.
Arms:Meter:Flow Control:Ramp Index: Meter Range: [0] - 99%

Down Tolerance (Q2) Disable: 0
Meter 212
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for flow rate error during the second stage of the end-of-batch ramp down and is
used to predict a valve fault condition as the batch ends. If during the second stage of the end-of-batch ramp down, the flow
rate is not decreasing within the percentage entered for this parameter, a "PO: Predict Overrun" alarm will occur which will
stop the batch and turn the pump off. Note this tolerance should be greater than the programmed product flow tolerance
% (Product 204) and needs to be large enough to allow for normal flow rate fluctuations during ramp down otherwise false
alarms may occur.
Arms:Meter:Volume Accuracy: Index: Meter Range: 0.001 to 99999.999

K-Factor
Meter 301
Description: Sets the nominal number of pulses representing one unit of volume registration.
Critical: Security level for parameter must be at top 2 levels.
Fatal: Entry must not be zero.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 175

Arms:Meter:Volume Accuracy:Dual Index: Meter Range: [0] - 999

Pulse Error Count
Meter 302
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for dual pulse errors before posting a pulse security alarm.
Note: Requires dual channel pulse meter input.
Arms:Meter:Volume Accuracy:Dual Index: Meter Range:

Pulse Error Reset Default: No Reset
Meter 303
Description: Sets the conditions which reset the dual pulse error count.
Selections:
• No Reset
• Transaction End
• Power-Up
• Transaction and Power-Up
Note: Clearing a pulse security alarm does not reset the error count.
Arms:Meter:Volume Accuracy:Dual Index: Meter Range: [0] - 9999

Pulse Flow Rate Cutoff
Meter 304
Description: Sets the flow rate below which dual pulse errors are not counted.
Note: Requires dual channel pulse meter input
Arms:Meter:Volume Accuracy:- Index: Meter Range:

Pulse Security Alarm Amount
Meter 305
Description: This program code determines whether pulses received after a Pulse Security Alarm occurs are ignored (no
volume or mass is registered). Select “no” to continue to totalize normally after this alarm occurs. Select “yes” to ignore all
pulses after an alarm occurs. Selecting “yes” will cause any volume or mass that actually flows through the meter from the
point where this alarm occurs to when the valve is completely closed to be ignored. The AccuLoad will ignore any pulses
from the meter until the alarm is cleared. Some measurement agencies require this behavior, taking the position that after a
pulse security alarm, the consumer cannot be responsible for any measured quantity because it may not be reliable.
Arms:Meter:Volume Accuracy: Index: Meter Range: [0] - 20

Pulse Period Sample Count
Meter 306
Description: Sets the amount of time in 0.1 second increments over which the frequency of the meter pulses is averaged to
provide flow rate smoothing. This parameter is intended for meters that produce a varying frequency pulse output when the
flow is steady.
Page 176 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range:

Freq Densitometer Type Default: N/A
Meter 401
Description: This parameter allows the operator to select the frequency densitometer used by the meter.
The factory default is "N/A."
Selections:
• NA
• Linear
• Solartron
• Sarasota
• UGC
• Other
Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range: 1 - 6

Share Temperature Input
Meter 402
Description: Selects a temperature input defined for another meter to be used with this meter. For example, a single
temperature probe may be used to supply temperature for several arms without having to use multiple analog inputs.
Selections:
• Not Used
• Arm 1 - 6, Meter 1 - 6
• Flow Rate Injector 1 - 4
Critical: Selected meter has no I/O point configured for temperature.

Share Density Input
Meter 403
Description: Selects a density input defined for another meter to be used with this meter. For example, a single density
probe may be used to supply density for several arms without having to use multiple analog inputs.
Selections:
• Not Used
• Arm 1 - 6 Meter 1 - 6
• Flow Rate Injector 1 - 4
Critical: Selected meter has no I/O point configured for density.

Mass Meter Type
Meter 425
Description: This parameter allows the operator to select the type of mass meter used.
Selections:
• NA
• Promass
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 177

Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range: 0 - 99999

Mass Meter Address
Meter 426
Description: Sets the address used for serial communications with this mass meter.
Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range: -1e+37 - 1e+38

Linear Densitometer A
Meter 1400
Description: Sets the value for the A coefficient used to in the equation to calculate the density. - Density = A*freq + B
Note: Scientific notation is used for this value.
Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range: -1e+37 - 1e+38

Linear Densitometer B
Meter 1401
Description: Sets the value for the B coefficient used to in the equation to calculate the density. - Density = A*freq + B
Note: Scientific notation is used for this value.
Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range: -9.9999 - 9.9999

Linear Densitometer DCF
Meter 1402
Description: The Density Correction Factor is used to correct the density reading from a densitometer. The density received
by the AccuLoad is multiplied by the DCF before it is used for volume calculations.
8.5.3.1 400—Solatron Densitometer

Solartron Calibration Cert Units
Meter 411
Description: This entry allows the user to select the calibration units used for the Solartron Densitometer.
Selections:
• English (Fahrenheit, PSI, Lb/Ft3)
• Metric (Celsius, Bar, Kg/m3)

Solartron DCF
Meter 412
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the density correction factor for computing the calculated density from
the actual density.
Selections:
Page 178 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range: -1e+37 and 1e+38

Solartron K0, K1, K2
Meter 413, 414, 415

Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the Constant K0, K1, K2 from the Solartron densitometer. Enter the
base number (six digits) and two digits for the exponent. This exponential numeric entry has a range of –1e37 to 1e38.

Solartron K18, K19, K20a, K20b,
K21a, K21b
Meter 416, 417, 418, 419, 420, 421

Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the Constant K18, K19, K20a, K20b, K21a, K21b from the Solartron
densitometer. Enter the base number (six digits) and two digits for the exponent. This exponential numeric entry has a range
of –1e37 to 1e38.

Solartron Tcal
Meter 422
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the temperature that the densitometer was calibrated at the factory. The
range of this entry is –9999.999 to 9999.999 (limit of three decimal points).

Solartron Pcal
Meter 423
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the pressure that the densitometer was calibrated at the factory.
The range of this entry is –9999.999 to 9999.999 (limit of three decimal places).
8.5.3.2 400—Sarasota Densitometer

Sarasota Calibration Cert Units Default: English
Meter 441
Description: This entry allows the user to select the calibration units used for the Sarasota Densitometer. The factory
default is "English."
Selections:

Sarasota DCF
Meter 442
the actual density. The range of six-digit numeric entry is -9.9999 to 9.9999.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 179


Sarasota K
Meter 443
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the calibration constant for the spool on the Sarasota densitometer.
The range of this exponential numeric entry is from -9.999999 to 9.999999.

Sarasota D0
Meter 444
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the constant D0 from the Sarasota densitometer. The range of this
eight- digit numeric entry is -9999.999 to 9999.999.

Sarasota T0
Meter 445
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the T0 constant from the Sarasota densitometer. This constant is in
microseconds. The range of this eight-digit numeric entry is -9999.999 to 9999.999.

Sarasota Tcoef
Meter 446
Description: This entry is used for entering the temperature coefficient constant from the Sarasota densitometer in
microseconds/degree F. The range of this exponential numeric entry is –9.999999 to 9.999999.

Sarasota Tcal
Meter 447
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the temperature that the densitometer was calibrated at the factory.
The range of this eight-digit numeric entry is –9999.999 to 9999.999.

Sarasota Pcoef
Meter 448
Description: This entry is used for entering the pressure coefficient constant from the Sarasota densitometer in
microseconds/PSIG. The range of this exponential numeric entry is –9.999999 to 9.999999.
Page 180 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.5.3.3 400—UGC Densitometer

UGC Calibration Cert Units Default: English
Meter 461
Description: This entry allows the user to select the calibration units used for the UGC Densitometer.
Selections:
• [English] (Fahrenheit, PSI, gr/cc)
• Metric (Celsius, Bar, gr/cc)

UGC DCF
Meter 462
the actual density.

UGC K0, K1, K2. Kt1, Kt2, kt3
Meter 463, 464, 465, 467, 468, 469

Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the Constant K0, K1, K2, Kt1, Kt2, Kt3 from the UGC densitometer.
Enter the base number (six digits) and then two digits for the exponent. The range of this exponential entry is –1e37 to 1e38.

UGC Tc
Meter 466

UGC Pc
Meter 470

UGC Kp1
Meter 471
Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the Pressure Constant Kp1 from the UGC densitometer. Enter the base
number (six digits) and then two digits for the exponent. The range of this exponential numeric entry is –1e37 to 1e38.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 181


UGC Kp2, Kp3
Meter 472, 473

Description: This entry allows the operator to enter the Constant Kp2, Kp3 from the UGC densitometer. Enter the base
number (six digits) and then two digits for the exponent. The range of this exponential numeric entry is –1e37 to 1e38.
8.5.3.4 400—Other Densitometer

Other Densitometer Calibration Default: English
Units
Meter 491
Description: This entry allows the user to select the calibration units used for the Solartron Densitometer. The factory
default is "English."
Selections:
• [English] (Fahrenheit, PSI, Lb/Ft3)

Other DCF
Meter 476
the actual density. The range of this six-digit numeric entry is –9.9999 to 9.9999.
Arms:Meter:Temperature/Density: Index: Meter Range: –1e37 to 1e38

Other A, B or C Coefficient
Meter 493, 494, 495

Description: This code allows the operator to enter the constant “a” or "b" by which the density will be calculated according
to the following formula:
Density = aT2 + bT + c
Where: T is the period of the incoming signal and a, b, and c are the programmed constants.
Nine digits must be entered for constant a. The first seven digits represent the base number and the last two numbers
represent the exponent. The +/- button may be used to set the sign of the base and the exponent field. The range of this
exponential numeric entry is .
Page 182 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arm:Meter:Pressure: Share Index: Meter Range: 1 - 6

Pressure Input
Meter 501
Description: Selects a pressure input defined for another meter to be used with this meter. For example, a single pressure
probe may be used to supply pressure for several arms without having to use multiple analog inputs.
Selections:
• Not Used
• Arm 1 - 6, Meter 1 - 6
Critical: Selected meter has no I/O point configured for pressure.
8.6 Product Directories
100—General Purpose Directory

200—Flow Control Directory
300—Volume Accuracy Directory
400—Temperature/Density Directory
500—Pressure Directory
8.6.1 100—Arm > Products > General Purpose Directory
Arms:Product:General Purpose: Index: Product Range: Text 20 characters max.

Product ID
Product 101
Description: Enter a name for this product.
Arms:Product:General Purpose: Index: Product Range: Text - 30 characters each

HM Classification Part 1 and Part 2
Product 102, 103

Description: Enter the Hazardous Materials (HM) Classification text printed on the BOL.
8.6.2 200—Arm:Products:Flow Control Directory
Arms:Products:FlowControl: Index: Product Range: [0] - 9999

Minimum Flow Rate
Product 201
Description: Sets the lowest (final stage) flow rate for the product. This will be the flow rate when the valve is signaled to
close at the completion of a preset.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 183

Arms:Products:Flow Control:High Index: Product Range: [0] - 99999

Flow Rate
Product 202
Description: Sets the maximum flow rate for this product during loading.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Sec- Index: Product Range: [0] - 99999

ond High Flow Rate Disable: 0
Product 203
Description: Sets a second high flow rate that is selectable by a digital input. This flow rate would normally be used in
situations where the size of the deliveries varies and a lower high flow rate is needed for the smaller batches.
Note: Not used with a two-stage flow control valve.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Flow Index: Product Range: 0 - 9%

Tolerance Percentage
Product 204
Description: Sets the threshold for making a valve adjustment as a percentage of the requested flow rate.
Example:
Current Flow Rate 600 GPM Flow Tolerance 9%
Flow rate can vary by + or - 54 GPM (600 GPM x 9% = 54 GPM) without a valve correction signal from the AccuLoad.
The AccuLoad will calculate the current flow deviation as a percentage of the target flow rate. This will be compared with
the programmed flow tolerance rate (below), with the larger of the two tolerances determining when to adjust the valve.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Flow Index: Product Range: 0 - 999 flow rate units

Tolerance Rate
Product 205
Description: Sets the threshold for making a valve adjustment as a number of flow rate units. For example, if this parameter
is set to 20, the AccuLoad will adjust the flow control valve anytime the actual flow rate varies more than 20 flow rate units
from the target flow rate.
The AccuLoad will calculate the current flow tolerance using the percentage entered in Product 204 and the current flow
rate. This will be compared with the programmed flow tolerance rate entered here. The larger of the two tolerances will
determine when to adjust the valve.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:First Index: Product Range: [0] - 9999 delivery units

Trip Amount
Product 206
Description: Sets remaining amount of delivery when the flow rate ramp-down should begin.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Sec- Index: Product Range: [0.0] - 99.9 delivery units

ond Trip Amount
Product 207
Description: Sets the remaining amount (in tenths) of delivery when the flow rate ramp-down ends and the valve is com-
pletely closed. 0.0 to 99.9 units.
Page 184 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Products:Flow Control:Sec- Index: Product Range: 1 - 9

ond Trip Auto Adjust
Product 208
Description: This one-digit numeric entry defines the number of batches to be included in the average used to calculate
the second adjustment. For a preset, this is the number of batches run.
This parameter provides the operator an automatic method of adjusting the final trip point of the valve. The use of this
parameter is ideal when starting up the system or when system hydraulics are changed during maintenance. The AccuLoad
will automatically set up the second trip amount (Product 207) when this parameter is used.
If for some reason the system parameters change and the second trip amount needs adjusted, the operator must get into
the Program Mode and reset the auto adjust to again automatically adjust the final stage trip point
Note: The batch volumes must be sufficient to allow the AccuLoad to reach high flow before the first trip point is
encountered.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Ex- Index: Product Range: [0] - 99%

cess High Flow
Alarm
Product 209
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the maximum percentage by which the flow rate can exceed the product's high
flow rate. This entry must be greater than the Flow Tolerance entry, except when a value of zero is entered to disable excess
high flow alarm checking. The excess rate is entered as a percentage of the product high flow rate.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Low Index: Product Range: [0] - 999

Flow Rate Alarm Limit
Product 210
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the low flow rate alarm which will be posted whenever a flow rate is equal to or
lower than the limit set and is maintained for eight seconds. The low flow alarm is not triggered in cases where there is no
flow.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Block Index: Product Range: 0 - 99 seconds

Valve Delay to Open
Product 211
Description: Sets a time delay (in seconds) for the opening of the product block valve prior to delivery of the product. If an
input is programmed for block valve feedback and the feedback does not indicate the valve is open within the programmed
delay, a block valve alarm will be triggered. The range of this two-digit numeric entry is 01 to 99 seconds. For example, if
the Block Valve Delay to Open entry is set to 05 seconds, the AccuLoad would allow 5 seconds for the block valve to open
or else an alarm would be triggered if the valve had not been opened. If no block valve feedback input has been configured,
the AccuLoad assumes that the valve has opened after the programmed delay.
Critical: Zero not allowed without block valve feedback.
Note: Applies only to sequential blender arms.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 185

Arms:Products:Flow Control:Block Index: Product Range: 0 - 99 seconds

Valve Delay to Close
Product 212
Description: Sets a time delay (in seconds) for the closing of the product block valve after the product has been delivered.
If an input is configured for block valve feedback and the feedback does not indicate that the valve has closed within the
programmed delay, a block valve alarm will be triggered. The range of this two-digit numeric entry is 01 to 99 seconds. For
example, if the block valve delay entry were set to 05 seconds once the delivery was completed, the AccuLoad would allow
5 seconds for the block valve to close, and then an alarm would be triggered. If no input is configured for block valve feed-
back, the AccuLoad assumes that the valve has closed after the programmed delay.
Critical: Zero not allowed without block valve feedback.
Note: Applies only to sequential blender arms.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Prod- Index: Product Range: 0-999 delivery units

uct Stop Amount
Product 213
Description: Sets the shut down point of the ratio product. When the remaining batch amount (preset type) is equal to or
less than this programmed value the ratio product valve will shut down. The flow rates for the ratio product with an early
shutdown will be set up such that its requirement towards the batch will be satisfied before the stop volume is met. This
feature can be used in lieu of specifying a clean line product and clean line volume in the arm directory. Operation of this
parameter is identical to the additive stop amount, except that the stop amount pertains to a product and not an additive.
Note: Using this feature will likely result in a period during the batch where the component percentages do not remain at
the desired blend ratio. Assuming the batch completes normally, the blend percentages will be accurate.
Note: If the clean line volume as specified in the arm flow control directory (Code 221) is greater than the value programmed
here then the ratio product will complete its delivery prior to the beginning of the clean line delivery. The clean line amount
in the arm control directory (Code 221) will take precedence over this parameter if its value is greater than the value pro-
grammed here.
Note: Applies only to ratio products on hybrid arms.
Arms:Products:Flow Control:Prod- Index: Product Range: [0] - 999.9

uct Stop Alarm Disable: 0
Product 214
Description: Sets the amount of under-run allowed for the product stop programmed in Product 213 - Product Stop Amount
before an alarm occurs.
Note: Due to the conflicting goals of maintaining the correct product percentage ratios throughout the batch while accom-
modating a product stop amount, it may be desirable to program this amount to a larger value to avoid spurious alarms. The
AccuLoad will favor an accurate final blend percentage and preset over a precise stop amount.
Note: Applies only to ratio products on hybrid arms.
8.6.3 300—Accuracy Directory
Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range: 1 to 99999 delivery units

Minimum Batch Amount
Product 301
Description: Sets a minimum batch size for this product. This value is used to calculate the minimum preset for the recipe.
An error message, "The minimum preset for this recipe is *." will be displayed. Any attempt to start a batch with a product
volume less than the minimum batch size for that product will not be allowed.
Note: * indicates the summation of all the minimum batches of the components of the recipe according to the percentages
programmed for that recipe.
Note: Not applicable to straight arms.
Page 186 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)
Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range: 0 - 9.99999

Meter Factor 1 through 5
Product 302, 304, 306, 308, 315

Description: The meter factors (1 - 5) and the associated flow rates below allow the entry of the meter factor curve. The
AccuLoad will perform linearization to calculate meter factors between the entered flow rates.
GV = Meter factor * IV
Note: If only a single meter factor is used, it must be put into program code 311. The flow rate selected in program code 312
or 314 must be set to "0". Under these conditions any other meter factors programmed will be ignored. The range of these
six-digit numeric entries is 0 to 9.99999.
Note: A zero entry in meter factor 1 will be considered an invalid entry. Zero entries in the remaining factors will result in that
factor and subsequent factors not being used. (e.g., if a zero entry is made for factor 2, factors 3 and 4 will not be used.)
Fatal: Entry must not be zero [311 only]
Critical: Factor varies more than the Linearized Factor Deviation.
Critical: Meter factors must be within 2% of the master meter factor.
Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range: 0 - 99999 flow rate units

Flow Rate 1 through 5
Product 303, 305, 307, 309, 316

Description: These five-digit entries are the flow rates at which the meter factors (codes 311, 313, 315, 317, 319) are de-
fined beginning with the highest flow rate in program code 303 and descending to the lowest flow rate in program code 316.
If only one meter factor is used, program code 311 or 313 must be set at "0". The range of these entries is 0 to 99999 flow
units.
Critical: Flow rates must be entered in descending order.
Critical: Corresponding meter factor not programmed.
Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range: [0] - 9.99999

Master Meter Factor Disable: 0
Product 310
Description: This program code allows the operator to set a master meter factor which restricts meter factors one through
four (codes 302, 304, 306 and 308), to plus or minus 2% of the master factor (i.e., the value entered here). This range
restriction applies only to meter factors which are programmed for use (i.e., meter factor one always and, if linearizing, all
the factors used). Any attempt to enter a meter factor outside the 2% range, if installed, will cause a Critical Warning. In
addition, a master factor entry that causes the current meter factors installed to be out of range will cause those meter
factors which are out of range to prompt a Critical Message. This critical condition must be corrected so that all used meter
factors are within the 2% range of the master factor before normal Run Mode operations can occur.
Critical: Meter factor must be within 2% of the master meter factor.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 187

Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range: [0] - 9.99%

Linearized Factor Deviation Disable: 0
Product 311
Description: Sets a maximum allowable deviation between adjacent meter factors. Any attempt to enter a meter factor
outside this range will cause a Critical Warning.
A linearized factor deviation entry that results in the current meter factors installed to be out of range will set a program code
alarm. The meter factors that are out of range will be indicated by a DA alarm. The meter factors at fault must be corrected
so they are within range of the deviation entry before normal Run Mode operations can occur.
Critical: Meter factor varies more than the Linearized Factor Deviation.
Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range:

Meter Factor Variation Select
Product 312
Description: Enables or disables meter factor variation based on the temperature of the product. The factory default is
"Disabled."
Selections:
• [Disabled]
• Enabled
Note: The magnitude of the variation is determined by the meter factor percent change per degree temperature parameter
below.
Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range: 0.0001 to 0.9999%

Meter Factor Percent Change Per
Degree Temperature
Product 313
Description: The amount in percentage that the meter factor varies for each degree change in temperature.
Note: Has no effect if Program Code 333 is disabled or temperature units are not assigned.
Arms:Products:Volume Accuracy: Index: Product Range: -999.9 - 999.9 degrees

Meter Factor Variation Reference
Temperature
Product 314
Description: Sets the meter factor variation reference temperature. This entry represents the temperature, in tenths, at
which the present meter factor was determined.
Note: Not applicable if Program Code 333 is disabled or temperature units are not assigned.
Page 188 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: -999.99 - +999.99 degrees

ty:High Temperature Alarm Limit Disable: 999.99
Product 402
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for a high temperature alarm to be posted.
Note: An entry of "+999" will disable the alarm.
Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: -999.99 - +999.99 degrees

ty:Low Temperature Alarm Limit Disable: -999.99
Product 403
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for a low temperature alarm to be posted.
Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: -999.9 to 999.9 degrees

ty:Maintenance Temperature Disable: -999.9
Product 401
Description: Maintenance temperature is used when a temperature probe is not installed or working, but temperature relat-
ed calculations are desired.
Note: An entry greater than -999.9 will override the temperature probe or transducer input if installed and will be used in all
calculations where temperature is used. Note that this may not be allowed in all weights & measures jurisdictions.
Note: Not applicable if Temperature Units = Not Used
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 189

Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range:

ty:API Table
Product 411
Description: This program code selects the temperature correction method used for the product being delivered.
Selections:
• None
• API 2004 crude oils
• API 2004 refined products
• API 2004 C Tables Special
• API 2004 Lube Oils
• API E Tables - LPG, NGL
• API 1952 (6,23,24,53,54)
• PTB-1 ethanol/bio blend
• PTB-3 ethanol/bio blend
• EPA-RFS2 (E100) - ethanol
• EPA-RFS2 (B100) - biodiesel
• Aromatics (ASTM D1555)
• Brazil ABNT5992 (Refden)
• Brazil ABNT5992 (RefGrade)
• Brazil ABNT5992 (LiveDen)
• Brazil BR1A
• Brazil BR1P
• Brazil BR2P
• NH3 - Ammonia
The old tables (API 1952) allow for non-60F/15C reference temperatures. In addition, the reference density may be at
a different temperature from the reference temperature. For example, the reference temperature may be 30C and the
reference density's temperature may be 15C. Product parameter #414 may be used to enter the reference density's
temperature. The API 1952 tables may be used for Asphalt temperature compensation. Old Tables 6, 24 and 54 may be
used in place of ASTM D4311 (Asphalt temperature compensation). ASTM D4311 uses a reference density of 1028.1
kg/m3 or 920.9 kg/m3.
Critical: API table conflicts with temperature units
Critical: No density input configured [odd tables only]
Critical: Live density is not available with PTB Ethanol blend calculation.
(PTB) available with 11.06 and higher. Table Aromatic available with 11.08 and higher.
Note: Eth and B100 (EPA-RFS2) equations for “Standardization of Volumes for renewable fuels per EPA 40 CFR Part 80
regulation of Fuels and Fuel additives”. A Reference Density entry is not required when using these equations; EPA –RFS2
uses a C of E of 0.000630 for ethanol and 0.000458 for B100 in these equations that can be entered for Reference Density
entry if volume to mass conversion is required.
Page 190 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: -9999.9 - 9999.9

ty: Reference Density
Product 412
Description: This entry specifies the reference density of the product (density at standard temperature/pressure) when not
using a densitometer.
Entry range based on table selection.
Table 6 999.9 to +999.9 API
Table 24 0 to 9.9999 Relative Density
Table 54, 60 0 to 9999.9 Reference Density
Eth/Gas (PTB) 0 to 9999.9 kg/m3
Note: If the API table selection is changed, the previous five-digit entry for reference will not be converted. This value must
be re-entered.
Note: The valid range for the E tables is 0.3500 to 0.6880 relative density @ 60°F or 351.7 to 687.8 kg/m3 @ 15° C or 331.7
to 683.6 kg/m3 @ 20° C per GPA TP-27 and API 11.2.4.
The following are examples of the display when Tables 24, 54 or 6C and 54C are selected.
Table 6B selected: +43.2 API

Table 24 selected: 0.8175 Rel Density
Table 54 selected: 1150.2 Kg/M3
Critical: Reference density is required for ethanol blends.
Note: For Eth/Gas (PTB) tables enter density @15C in units of kg/ m3, regardless of what the reference temperature
(System 402) is programmed for.
Arms:Products:Temperature/ Index: Product Range:

Density: Reference Density Units
Product 1400
Description: This entry allows the user to specify the units associated with the value entered in Product 413 – Reference
Density
Selections:
• NA
• °API
• lb/ft3
• kg/m3
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 191

Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: 0 - 999.9

ty:Reference Density
Temperature
Product 418
Description: In some applications, the temperature used to obtain the reference density may not always be the same as
the base temperature used for volume correction. The AccuLoad will allow entering a separate reference temperature for the
reference density. Volumes will continue to be corrected to the programmed reference temperature in System Directory 402.
This feature will only be available with the API 2004 tables (i.e. 6A\B\D, 24A\B\D, 54A\B\D, 60A\B\D), old tables and aromat-
ics.
For example, this parameter will allow entering a reference density measured at 15C and correcting volumes to 30C or enter
a reference density measured at 60F and correct volumes to 86F.
Critical: Reference density must be 15°C or 59°F for PTB ethanol blends.
Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: 0 - 999.9

ty:Coefficient of Expansion
Product 1401
Description: This entry, in units of percent per degree of temperature, specifies the amount of expansion as a percentage
for the product when using a ‘C’ type table. For example, a Coefficient of Expansion with a value of 0.0010720 would be
entered as a percentage value of 0.107200.

ty:Densitometer Type
Product 1402
Description: This entry specifies whether a live densitometer is used and if so, whether it is providing a density corrected to
reference temperature or is providing the observed density at line conditions.
Selections:
• No Densitometer
• Observed Density
• Corrected Density

ty:Calculate Current
Reference Density
Product 417
Description: This entry enables calculation of a real-time reference density from current temperature and live (observed)
density. An average reference density calculation for the delivery is always included, but if the reference density needs to
be monitored during the delivery, enable this option.
Selections:
• No
• Yes
Page 192 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: -999.9 - +999.9 API

ty:High Density Alarm Limit for other density units 0 - 9999.0
Product 413
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the high density alarm.
Note: Not applicable if Density Units = Not Used.

ty:Low Density Alarm Limit for other density units 0 - 9999.0
Product 414
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the low density alarm

ty:Maintenance Density for other density units 0 - 9999.0
Product 1403
Description: This program code allows for the entry of a maintenance density in situations where the densitometer fails, etc.
and the density value must be entered via the user interface or communications.
Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: 0 - 99999 delivery units

ty:Delta Amount
Product 415
Description: This parameter applies to unloading arms only, and specifies the batch quantity between density samples
–999.9 to +999.9 API used to calculate the percentage of contaminant during unloading. A maximum of ten samples are
taken over the course of a batch. Each of the samples is a flow- weighted average over the amount defined by this entry.
The density sample for the 10th delta amount delivered (or the last complete sample if less than 10) will be considered the
density of the pure uncontaminated product when the contaminant percentage is calculated.
Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: 0 - 9999.9 density units

ty:Contaminant Density
Product 416
Description: This parameter applies to unloading arms only, and specifies the density value assumed for the contaminant
(such as water) that may be present in an unloading operation. It is used in the calculation to determine the percentage of
contaminant present during the unloading operation.
Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: -1e+37 and 1e+38

ty:PTB kOE Method 1
Product 425
Description: This entry is the coefficient required to implement the PTB k0E method 1 algorithm for ethanol/biodiesel
blends.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 193

Arms:Products:Temperature/Den- Index: Product Range: -1e+37 and 1e+38

sity:PTB A1 Method 3 A1, A2, A3
Coefficients
AProduct 420, 421, 422

Description: These parameters provide temperature compensation of ethanol and gasoline blends using the PTB equation.
The AccuLoad will allow entering the coefficients used in the equation to allow for other blends as new data is available from
PTB.
- > -1.12345e-09
Critical: A1, A2 and A3 constants are required for ethanol blends.

ty:Ethanol Grade (%M/M)
Product 426
Description:
Arms:Products:Temperature/Densi- Index: Product Range: -1e+37 to +1e+38

ty:Aromatic Hydrocarbon Product
Arms 423
Description: This program code specifies the industrial aromatic hydrocarbon or cyclohexane product being delivered.
Temperature compensation will be performed according to the ASTM D 1555 standard. This entry is only applicable if API
table (product parameter #411) is programmed for "Aromatic" and temperature units (system parameter #401 are
programmed.
For impure products, product parameter #424 may be used to enter the density of the mixture. Otherwise the density of the
pure product will be used in the calculations.
• Benzene
• Cumene
• Cyclohexane
• Ethylbenzene
• Styrene
• Toluene
• m-Xylene
• 0-Xylene
• p-Xylene
• 300-350F Aromatic
• 350-400F Aromatic
Arms:Products:Temperature/Den- Index: Product Range: 0 -9999.99

sity:Aromatic Hydrocarbon Refer-
ence Density
Arms 424
Description: This parameter is used to enter the reference density of an aromatic hydrocarbon product that is considered
impure. If 0 is entered, the density of the pure product will be used in the calculations. Reference density should be entered
in density units of kg/m3 and should be based at the programmed reference temperature (system parameter #402) or the
reference density's temperature (product parameter #414)
Note: If "300-350°F Aromatic" or "350-400°F Aromatic" product is selected, the reference density for the product must be
entered. Otherwise the conversion of volume and mass will not be available (i.e. if volume pulse input, mass will not be
available. If mass pulse input, volume will not be available.
Page 194 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Products:Temperature/% Index: Product Range:

Water in NH3
Product 1404
Description:
Arm:Product:Pressure:High Index: Product Range: [0] - 9999 pressure units

Pressure Alarm Limit
Product 503
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the High Pressure Alarm to be generated.
Arm:Product:Pressure:Low Index: Product Range: [0] - 9999 pressure units

Pressure Alarm Limit
Product 504
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the Low Pressure Alarm to be generated.
Arms:Products:Pressure: Index: Product Range: 0.0 - 9999.9 pressure units

Maintenance Pressure Disable: 0.0
Product 501
Description: Sets a pressure to be used when a pressure transmitter is not installed or is not working, but pressure-related
calculations are desired.
Arms:Products:Pressure: Index: Product Range: 0 - 99999

Pressure Coefficient
Product 502
Description: This code will allow for the entry of a Compressibility Factory that will be used by the system to calculate the
CPL. This entry should be zero except when API 2004 C Tables is selected for the API table and pressure compensation is
required as the AccuLoad has no density with which to calculate the compressibility factor. The factor is used as the follow-
ing: XXXXX equals the factor entered and it is applied as 0.0000XXXXX.
Note: This value will represent the "F" variable in the CPL equation.
Arms:Products:Pressure: Index: Product Range: [0] - 9999 pressure units

Differential Pressure Disable: 0
Product 511
Description: Sets the additional pressure to be maintained above the vapor or back pressure. In this situation, the low-pres-
sure alarm must be set high enough to ensure that the pressure does not fall below the product's vapor pressure.
Note: A non-zero entry here will override any other programmed type of back pressure flow control.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 195

Arms:Products:Pressure:Minimum Index: Product Range: [0] - 9999 flow rate units

Back Pressure Flow Rate
Product 512
Description: Sets the minimum flow rate allowed when reducing the flow rate to maintain the minimum back pressure. The
AccuLoad will post an alarm if the flow rate would need to be reduced below this level to maintain the target back pressure.
Arms:Products:Pressure:Minimum Index: Product Range: 0 - 99 seconds

Back Pressure Flow Rate Timer Disable: 0
Product 513
Description: Sets the minimum time, in seconds, allowed for the unit to achieve a desired flow rate. If the flow rate is not
reached in this time, the flow rate will be lowered by a percentage because of insufficient back pressure. If the flow rate falls
below the back pressure minimum flow, an alarm will be issued and the valve will be closed.
If a differential pressure is entered in Product 511, this pressure must be attained within this time period after a flow rate
change. If not, the flow rate will be lowered due to insufficient back pressure.
Note: This entry is used for Automatic Flow Optimization (AFO).
Arms:Products:Pressure:Back Index: Product Range: 50 - 90%

Pressure Percent Reduction
Product 514
Description: This two-digit entry will allow the operator to select the percentage of flow rate to be used during insufficient
back pressure conditions or insufficient flow conditions. (For example, an entry of 90% will cause the flow rate to be reduced
to 90% of the current rate during insufficient back pressure conditions.)
Note: This entry is used for Automatic Flow Optimization (AFO).
Arms:Products:Pressure: Index: Product Range: [0] - 9999

Back Pressure Flow Recovery
Pressure
Product 515
Description: Sets the amount of pressure above the vapor pressure of the product that will trigger the AccuLoad to attempt
flow recovery to the programmed high flow.
Note: This function requires a pressure input and this pressure must be sufficiently higher than the differential pressure
entered in Product 511 to prevent flow rate oscillation.
Arms:Products:Pressure:Back Index: Product Range: [0] - 99 minutes

Pressure Flow Recovery Timer Disable: 0
Product 516
Description: Sets the time the AccuLoad will wait to attempt flow rate recovery if a pressure reading is not available. This
parameter provides a method of flow recovery that does not require the use of a pressure transmitter input.
Page 196 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Arms:Products:Pressure:Vapor Index: Product Range:

Pressure Calculation Method
Product 521
Description: This parameter defines the method that the AccuLoad will use to calculate the vapor pressure of a product.
Selections:
• Straight Line Approximation (Requires points of the curve to be entered in codes 522 through 527).
• GPA TP-15 (absolute)
• GPA TP-15 (gauge): As outlined in GPA TP-15 (Gas Processors Association Technical Publication 15). (Uses the reference
density of the product in the calculations).
Critical: GPA-TP15 requires corrected density [temperature used, API table selected]
Arms:Products:Pressure:Vapor Index: Product Range: [0.0] - 9999.9

Pressures 1 - 3
Arms 522, 524, 526

Description: These three parameters are used to define the vapor pressure portion of the vapor pressure versus tempera-
ture curve used to calculate the current vapor pressure. The pressure(s) are defined lowest to highest. The vapor pressure
calculation, determined from the entries made here, will be used both for differential back pressure control and in the CPL
equation as the "Pe" entry. Therefore, careful consideration should be given in determining these points and their accuracy.
Critical: Vapor pressures must be entered in ascending order.
Arms:Products:Pressure:Vapor Index: Product Range: -999 - +999 degrees

Pressure Temperatures 1 - 3
Product 523, 525, 527

Description: These three parameters are used to define the temperature portion of the vapor pressure versus temperature
curve used to calculate the current vapor pressure. These temperatures correspond with the vapor pressures. The vapor
pressure calculation, determined from the entries made here, will be used both for differential back pressure control and in
the CPL equation as the "Pe" entry. Therefore, careful consideration should be given in determining these points and their
accuracy.
Critical: Corresponding vapor pressure not programmed.
Note: Not used for Vapor Pressure Calculation Method = GPA-TP15
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 197

8.7 Recipe Directories
Product Blend
Recipe Additives
8.7.1 Product Blend
Recipes:Product Blend:Recipe Index: Recipe Range: 1 - 6

Used
Recipes 001
Description: This program code indicates whether a recipe is configured for use.
Selections:
• Not Used
• Load Arm 1 - 6
Critical: Load Arm not configured.
Note: Load Arms 3 through 6 are not available on the AccuLoad-ST hardware.
Recipes:Product Blend:Recipe Index: Recipe Range: Text - 20 characters max.

Name
Recipes 002
Description: Assigns a name for this recipe
Recipes:Product Blend:HM Classi- Index: Recipe Range: 1 - 6

fication
Recipes 003
Description: Selects a product Hazardous Materials (HM) Classification for this recipe. This HM Classification will print on
the load ticket for this recipe. HM Classifications are defined in the individual product directories.
Selections:
• Product 1 - 6
Critical: Product not configured.
Recipes:Product Blend:Product Index: Recipe Range: 1 - 6

Delivery Order 1 - 6
Recipes 004, 006, 008, 010, 012, 014

Description:
Sequential Blending: These parameters define the order of delivery of the sequentially blended products in this recipe. This
applies to sequential blending arms and the sequentially delivered products on a hybrid arm.
Selections:
• Not Used
• Product 1 - 6
Critical: First component must be programmed [--04 only]
Note: Applies to sequential blending arms and hybrid arms only
Note: For hybrid arms, the ratio products are counted first.
Page 198 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Recipes:Product Blend:Product Index: Recipe Range: 0.0 - 100.0%

Percentage 1 - 6
Recipes 005, 007,009, 011, 013, 015

Description: These parameters set the percentage of each product in a recipe as a percentage of the total batch that is to
be contributed by this product. The percentages of the six products (ratio blending) or six components (sequential blending)
must add up to one hundred percent; otherwise, a critical warning will be issued. For example, 0 would mean that this
product is not to be included in the recipe, and 100.0 would mean that the recipe was to consist entirely of this product.
Hybrid Blending: Program product percentages for the ratio products first. The remaining parameters can be used to speci-
fy the percentages for the sequential products.
Critical: Component percentages must sum to 100%.
Critical: Component percentage not used with straight product.
Critical: Component percentage not used with ratio blending [13, 15; others depend on number of product selection for ratio
blend for this load arm]
Recipes:Product Blend:Clean Line Index: Recipe Range: 1 - 6

Deduct
Recipes 016
Description: Selects the product from which the clean line volume is to be deducted. In the Ready Mode, when a
recipe is selected and a preset amount is entered, the preset is divided among the products according to the percentages
programmed in the recipe. The clean line volume is deducted from the preset volume of the product selected here. If the
product selected is not part of this recipe, a critical warning will be issued. The range of this entry is one through six.
For example, assume a recipe with 50% of products 1 and 2. The clean line is 50 gallons of product 4. A preset of 1000
gallons is entered. This preset is divided among products 1 and 2: 500 gallons each. If product 1 is selected here as the
product from which to deduct clean line, then the product 1 preset would be 500 – 50 = 450 gallons. When START is
pressed, products 1 and 2 would deliver 450 gallons and 500 gallons, respectively. When products 1 and 2 have been
delivered, 50 gallons of the clean line product (product 4) will be delivered.
Selections:
• Product 1 - 6
Critical: Product not used in recipe.
Critical: Clean Line Deduct must be Product 1 when recipe is assigned to a side-stream blending arm.
Recipes:Product Blend: Clean Line Index: Recipe Range: 1 - 6

Product
Recipes 089
Description: This parameter specifies the product used to 'pack' the load arm and meter run at the end of the batch. This
allows the operator to set a clean line product on a per-recipe basis.
If Load Arm parameter "221 Clean Line Amount" is greater than zero and if "Recipe 32 - Clean Line Prd" is not set to "NA",
the product as programmed in here in "Recipe 32 - Clean Line Prd" will be the clean line product. In other words, the clean
line product programmed in the recipe directory will take precedence over the clean line product programmed in the arm
directory provided that the recipe clean line product is not "NA". If the recipe clean line product is programmed as "NA" then
the clean line product will be that as programmed in the arm directory ("222 Clean Line Product").
Selections:
• Not Used
• Product 1 - 6
Critical: Product cannot be a side stream product (ratio product plumbed upstream of the sequential product meter) on a
hybrid arm.
Critical: Product greater than the number of products available for this arm.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 199

Recipe:Product Blend:Ratio Index: Recipe Range:

Delivery Mode
Recipes 090
Description: This program code allows for a ratio plumbed arm configuration to deliver products one after the other instead
of concurrently. Recipes where ratio percentages are difficult to achieve concurrently due to system hydraulics, or where
endothermic reactions could significantly affect results may be configured to deliver each product successively with this
program code.
Selections:
Concurrent – Products are set up to flow simultaneously (traditional ratio blending) mixing in the arm as they are flowing
into the vessel.
Successive – Products are set up to flow one after the other (sequentially) and mixing once they are in the vessel.
If this option is set to ‘1 – Successive’ then the product order of delivery must also be specified (as for a sequential blending
arm).
8.7.2 Recipe Additives
Recipes:Recipe Additives: Additive Index: Recipe Range: 0.000 - 9999.999

Amount/Cycle
Recipes - See table below

Description: Defines the volume of additive product that will be injected for each cycle of additive injector (e.g., an entry of
000.100 shows that one-tenth of a unit of additive will be injected each cycle of the injector).
For piston or metered injectors, the units for this additive volume are as programmed in system code 881. For smart injec-
tors, this is the number downloaded to the smart injector. The units may be fixed or programmed on the smart injector.
When using a Smart Additive Injector System, the additive injector volume is downloaded to the additive injector at the start
of each batch.
Some additive injectors do not support the full range that we have offered here. Titan injectors accept only whole numbers
for the volume. Smith and Gate City injectors (Blend-Pak, Mini-Pak, and AccuTroller) accept injector volume in tenths. The
AccuLoad will truncate the entry to the format required for the smart injector.
Recipes:Recipe Additives:Additive Index: Recipe Range: 0 - 999 delivery units or 0 - 20%

Rate

Description: Defines the rate at which additive is injected into the product stream during delivery. This is the volume of the
main product per additive injection, typically 40 gallons or 100 liters.
If the injector is a flow controlled injector, the value represents a percentage of the preset amount that this additive will com-
prise. For example, with a preset of 1000 units and this parameter programmed to 10.0, the result will be 900 units of the
component products in the recipe plus 100 units of this additive. The range is 0 to 20.0 percent.
Recipes:Recipe Additives:Product Index: Recipe Range: 1 - 24

Using Additive

Description: This entry is used to select whether this injector is to be used with this recipe and with which products it will be
used. Each of the 24 possible injectors may be used with the products being loaded in this recipe.
• Product 1 - 24
This program code allows the operator to select which products use a respective injector in a blender. Products using an
injector are marked with an asterisk. The number of products shown on the display is dependent on the number of products
configured for the respective load arm.
Page 200 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Additives Additive Amount/Cycle Additive Rate Product Using Additive

Injector 1 017 018 019
Injector 2 020 021 022
Injector 3 023 024 025
Injector 4 026 027 028
Injector 5 029 030 031
Injector 6 032 033 034
Injector 7 035 036 037
Injector 8 038 039 040
Injector 9 041 042 043
Injector 10 044 045 046
Injector 11 047 048 049
Injector 12 050 051 052
Injector 13 053 054 055
Injector 14 056 057 058
Injector 15 059 060 061
Injector 16 062 063 064
Injector 17 065 066 067
Injector 18 068 069 070
Injector 19 071 072 073
Injector 20 074 075 076
Injector 21 077 078 079
Injector 22 080 081 082
Injector 23 083 084 085
Injector 24 086 087 088

8.8 Split Architecture Directories
Split Architecture:Configuration: Index: None Range: Text - 28 characters max.

Board Set ID
Split Architecture 1608

Description: A unique/descriptive identifier for this Split Arch configuration board set.
Split Architecture:Configuration: Index: None Range:

Stop Key

Description: Select if pressing the Stop All button should stop all arms on both HMIs or stop arms on this HMI only.
Selections:
• Arms on Both HMIs
• Arms on HMI only
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 201

Split Architecture:Configuration: Index: None Range:

Idle Arm Alarm

Description: Select if all arms should be stopped when an alarm occurs on an idle arm that can't be displayed.
Selections:
• Stop Arms
• Don't Stop Arms
Split Architecture:Board Index: None Range: 000.000.000.000

Addresses:Board Set 2

Description: Enter the Internal IP Address of other board sets in the Split Arch configuration.
Help: See Figure 1 for additional information.
Split Architecture:Board Ad- Index: None Range: 000.000.000.000

dresses:Board Set 3

Split Architecture:Board Ad- Index: None Range: 000.000.000.000

dresses:Board Set 4

Page 202 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

8.8.1. Split Architecture Board Sets
Figure 173: Board Set 1
Dual HMI
Note: The AccuLoad’s
MMI A MMI B default factory IP
address settings are
Network Se�ngs: Network Se�ngs:
shown in these examples.
IP Address: 10.0.0.6 IP Address: 10.0.0.7
These may not reflect
Connec�ons: Connec�ons: the IP ddresses used
URL: h�p://10.0.0.1/ URL: h�p://10.0.0.1/ in the final installaton
bay=A/?secret=HMI bay=B/?secret=HMI of the system.
Board Set SAA
Program Mode Parameters
1720 - Internal IP: 10.0.0.1
1721 - THMI IP Address:

10.0.0.6
1722 - THMI B IP Address:

10.0.0.7
MMI A
Note: The AccuLoad’s
Network Se�ngs: default factory IP
IP Address: 10.0.0.6 Two Board Sets—Single MMI
address settings are
Connec�ons:
Board Set SAA Board Set SAB shown in these examples.
URL: h�p://10.0.0.1/
Program Mode Parameters Program Mode Parameters These may not reflect
bay=A/?secret=HMI the IP addresses used
1720 - Internal IP Address: 1720 - Internal IP address:
10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2
in the final installaton
of the system.
1721 - THMI IP Address: 1721 - THMI IP Address:
10.0.0.6 0.0.0.0
1722 - THMI B IP Address: 1722 - THMI B IP Address:

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
1611 - Board Set 2 Address: 10.0.0.2 1611 - Board Set 2 Address: 10.0.0.1
MMI A Two Board Sets—Two MMIs MMI B
Network Se�ngs: Board Set SAA Board Set SAB Network Se�ngs:
IP Address: 10.0.0.6 Program Mode Parameters Program Mode Parameters IP Address: 10.0.0.7
Connec�ons: 1720 - Internal IP Address: 1720 - Internal IP Address: Connec�ons:

URL: h�p://10.0.0.1/ 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 URL: h�p://10.0.0.2/
bay=A/?secret=HMI bay=B/?secret=HMI
1721 - THMI IP Address: 1721 - THMI IP Address:
10.0.0.6 0.0.0.0
1722 - THMI B IP Address: 1722 - THMI B IP Address:

0.0.0.0 10.0.0.7
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 203

MMI A
Note: The
Network Sengs:
Three Board Sets—Single MMI AccuLoad’s
IP Address: 10.0.0.6 factory default
Board Set SAA Board Set SAB Board Set SAC IP address settings
Connecons:
Program Mode Parameters Program Mode Parameters Program Mode Parameters are shown in these
URL: hp://10.0.0.1/
bay=A/?secret=HMI examples. These
1720 - Internal IP Address: 1720 - Internal IP Address: 1720 - Internal IP Address: may not reflect the
10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3
IP addresses used
1721 - THMI IP Address: 1721 - THMI IP Address: 1721 - THMI IP Address: in the final installation
10.0.0.6 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 of the system.
1722 - THMI B IP Address: 1722 - THMI B IP Address: 1722 - THMI B IP Address:

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
1611 - Board Set 2 Address: 10.0.0.2 1611 - Board Set 2 Address: 10.0.0.1 1611 - Board Set 2 Address: 10.0.0.1
MMI A MMI B
Network Sengs:
Three Board Sets—Two MMIs Network Sengs:
IP Address: 10.0.0.6 IP Address: 10.0.0.7
Board Set SAA Board Set SAB Board Set SAC
Connecons: Connecons:
Program Mode Parameters Program Mode Parameters Program Mode Parameters
URL: hp://10.0.0.1/ URL: hp://10.0.0.3/
bay=A/?secret=HMI bay=B/?secret=HMI
1720 - Internal IP Address: 1720 - Internal IP Address: 1720 - Internal IP Address:
10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3
1721 - THMI IP Address: 1721 - THMI IP Address: 1721 - THMI IP Address:

10.0.0.6 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
1722 - THMI B IP Address: 1722 - THMI B IP Address: 1722 - THMI B IP Address:

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.0.0.7
Page 204 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Appendix
9 Appendix I—Alarms
Smart Additive Inject Alarm Cross Reference

Blend-Pak Injector – From the Blend-Pak's Point of View AccuLoad III AccuLoad IV Equivalent Error Code
Excess Additive RA: Additive Frequency Alarm
No Additive Flow NA: No Additive Pulses Alarm
No Fuel Flow GA: Additive Injector Error
Low Additive KA: Low Additive Volume
Leaking Solenoid MA: Excess Additive Pulses
No Act. Time-Out GA: Additive Injector Error
Fuel Flow Switch GA: Additive Injector Error
Low Flow Switch Failure GA: Additive Injector Error
Flash Vol Alarm GA: Additive Injector Error
Communication Error to Additive Injector CT: Additive Communication Totals
Mini-Pak Injector/AccuTroller – From the Mini-Pak/
AccuLoad IV Equivalent Error Code
AccuTroller's Point of View
Additive Cycle Volume Alarm GA: Additive Injector Error
No Additive Alarm NA: No Additive Pulses Alarm
Leaking Solenoid MA: Excess Additive Pulses
Firmware Failure GA: Additive Injector Error
EEPROM Failure GA: Additive Injector Error
Communication Error to Additive Injector CT: Additive Communication Totals
Titan Injector – From the Titan's Point of View AccuLoad IV Equivalent Error Code
Alarm Low 1 RA: Additive Frequency Alarm
Alarm Low 2 KA: Low Additive Volume
Pulse Detection NA: No Additive Pulses Alarm
Alarm High MA: Excess Additive Pulses
Product Pulse Failure GA: Additive Injector Error
Unclean Product GA: Additive Injector Error
Table of Equivalent Error Codes

Add-Pak (AICB) AccuLoad IV Equivalent Error Code
Injections occurring too fast OR: Overspeed Injector
CR: Inj Command Rejected
No additive pulses occurring NA: No Add Pulses
Out of tolerance high RA: Additive Frequency Alarm
Out of tolerance low KA: Low Additive Volume
Excess additive pulses MA: Excess Additive Pulse
Additive total at least 10 times greater than expected CT: Additive Communication Totals
injection volume per injection
Faulty ROM or RAM D1: Add-Pak Diagnostic Alarm
Metered Injector – If this happens AccuLoad IV – This alarm occurs...
Injections are occurring too fast (before the previous one is com- OR: Overspeed Metered Injector
plete)
No additive pulses are registering (no pulses have been registered NA: No Additive Pulses Alarm
from previous injection)
Out of tolerance high (meter constantly out of tolerance on high side) RA: Additive Frequency Alarm
Out of tolerance low (meter constantly out of tolerance on low side) KA: Low Additive Volume
Excess Additive Pulses MA: Excess Additive Pulses
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 205

AccuLoad IV DA Alarms
Arm Program Error This alarm indicates a conflict or inconsistency in arm configuration.
Arm Recipe Program Error This alarm indicates a conflict or inconsistency in arm recipe selection.
A4B Comm Fail This alarm indicates a failure on the A4B.
Display Failure This alarm indicates a failure in data transmission to the display.
Flash Corrupt on Power Up This alarm indicates that flash memory failed to successfully complete the power up testing sequence.
Flash Memory Error This alarm indicates a flash memory failure.
Meter Program Error This alarm indicates a conflict or inconsistency in meter configuration.
Passcode Reset This alarm indicates that the passcode has been reset.
Product Program Error This alarm indicates a conflict or inconsistency in product configuration.
RAM Bad When displayed, this alarm indicates a RAM failure.
RAM Corrupt on Power Up This alarm indicates that RAM failed to successfully complete the power up testing sequence.
Recipe Program Error The alarm indicates a conflict or inconsistency in recipe configuration.
ROM Bad When displayed, this alarm indicates a ROM failure.
System Program Error This alarm indicates a conflict or inconsistency in system configuration.
Watchdog Alarm Indicates an internal check feature has detected a possible operational problem in the microprocessor that
may have affected information stored in memory. A complete review of all program codes stored in memo-
ry must be made to confirm their correctness.
Page 206 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

10 Appendix II—Metered Injector Map on the AccuLoad IV
S1-2
Injector # Communica- Address Input Point Output Points Input Point Output Points
Board
(AccuLoad) tions Address Jumper on (A4I) (A4I) (AccuLoad) (AccuLoad)
A4I Board
1 NA A4M - A4B NA NA NA NA NA
Pump = 1 A4I 1 = 39
5 101 A4I #1 Out 1 A4I 1 = 24
Solenoid = 2 A4I 2 = 40
Pump = 3 A4I 3 = 41
6 102 A4I #1 Out 2 A4I 2 = 25
Pump = 5 A4I 5 = 43
7 103 A4I #1 Out 3 A4I 3 = 26
Pump = 7 A4I 7 = 45
8 104 A4I #1 Out 4 A4I 4 = 27
Pump = 9 A4I 9 = 47
9 105 A4I #1 Out 5 A4I 5 = 28
Pump = 11 A4I 11 = 49
10 106 A4I #1 Out 6 A4I 6 = 29
Pump = 13 A4I 13 = 51
11 107 A4I #1 Out 7 A4I 7 = 30
Pump = 15 A4I 15 = 53
12 108 A4I #1 Out 8 A4I 8 = 31
Pump = 17 A4I 17 = 55
13 109 A4I #1 Out 9 A4I 9 = 32
Pump = 19 A4I 19 = 57
14 110 A4I #1 Out 10 A4I 10 = 33
Pump = 1 A4I 1 = 59
15 201 A4I #2 In 1 A4I 1 = 34
Pump = 3 A4I 3 = 61
16 202 A4I #2 In 2 A4I 2 = 35
Pump = 5 A4I 5 = 63
17 203 A4I #2 In 3 A4I 3 = 36
Pump = 7 A4I 7 = 65
18 204 A4I #2 In 4 A4I 4 = 37
Pump = 9 A4I 9 = 67
19 205 A4I #2 In 5 A4I 5 = 38
Pump = 11 A4I 11 = 69
20 206 A4I #2 In 6 A4I 6 = 39
Pump = 13 A4I 13 = 71
21 207 A4I #2 In 7 A4I 7 = 40
Pump = 15 A4I 15 = 73
22 208 A4I #2 In 8 A4I 8 = 41
Pump = 17 A4I 17 = 75
23 209 A4I #2 In 9 A4I 9 = 42
Pump = 19 A4I 19 = 77
24 210 A4I #2 In 10 A4I 10 = 43
Note: Add-Pak parameters and mappings are fixed and set automatically.
Note: If one Add-Pak injector is programmed to operate, then all addresses are reserved and are unable to be used for any other injector for
the entire system in an address bank. Banks are 100 through 110 and 200 through 210. Note that the addresses 100 and 200 are system
addresses for the entire A4I board.
Note: Special attention should be paid to the Configuration 020 parameter (Number of Injectors). This number provides the number of injectors
that will be used staring at Injector #1 and running sequentially to #24. If an injector number is not programmed up, its position is still counted.
Example: Only two injectors are needed and these are Add-Paks. Injector positions numbers 5 and 6 are configured as Add-Pak injectors. The
parameter CF 020 must be set to at least 6, since the accounting starts at injector #1 and continues sequentially to #6. Injectors #1 through #4
count against this number, even though they are not currently configured.
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 207

11 Appendix III—Default Blending Arm Batch Page Report
Page 208 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

12 Appendix IV—Default Straight Product Arm Report
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 209

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Related Publications
13 Related Publications
The following literature can be obtained from TechnipFMC Measurement Solutions Literature Fulfillment at
measurement.fulfillment@TechnipFMC.com or online at http://info.smithmeter.com/literature/online_index.html.
When requesting literature from Literature Fulfillment, please reference the appropriate bulletin number and title.
Modbus Communications .............................................................................................................Bulletin MN06131L

Installation.......................................................................................................................................Bulletin MN06201
Upgrade to ST and QT....................................................................................................................Bulletin MN06203
Upgrade SA from III to IV................................................................................................................Bulletin MN06206
Smith Communications.................................................................................................................Bulletin MN06204L
Parts List......................................................................................................................................... Bulletin PO06200
Specifications...................................................................................................................................Bulletin SS06200
Calculations......................................................................................................................................Bulletin TP06004
Page 210 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

AccuLoad IV Operator Reference Manual Index
A Calibration Menu—61, 69, 71-78

A4B—62-64, 96-97, 99, 102-103, 105, 125, 206-207 Captive Card—139-140
A4I—62-64, 95, 97, 102-103, 105-106, 129, 141, 152, Card Reader—8-10, 123, 138-139, 141, 144
207 Clean Line—129, 145, 148, 164, 166-167, 186, 199
A4M—17, 62-64, 79, 90, 100, 103, 105-106, 110, 125, Configuration Directories—39, 94, 96
207 COP (Cross Over Prevention)—129, 136, 138, 141
AC—17, 102-103, 105-107 Cross Over Prevention (COP)—129, 136, 138, 141
AccuLoad ID—35
AccuMate—11, 35, 40-42, 60-61, 78, 115, 142, 171 D
Active Alarms—51-53, 75 Date Format—112, 211
Additive Directory—39, 145 Date/Time—55, 113
Additive Injector—7, 10-11, 18, 48, 50, 53-54, 103, 106, Daytime Display—19
129, 141, 146-147, 151, 200, 205 DB (Database) Settings—69, 71
Additive Injector Error—129, 205 DC—98, 102-103, 105-107, 98
Additive Pump—105-106, 147, 168 Decimal/Comma Select—112, 115
DE Head—96, 103-104, 129
Add-Pak—102-103, 105-106, 129, 151-152, 205, 207
Delivery Amount Type—27, 120, 126
AFO (Automatic Flow Optimization)—196
Densitometer—99, 109, 127, 175-182, 191-193
AHJ (Authorities Having Jurisdiction)—42
Density Prompt—127
AICB—129, 141, 151, 205 Density Sampling—48, 50
Alarm History—52-53, 67-68 Density Units—127, 156, 157, 191, 193-194
Alarm Pulse Count—145, 148-149 Device Information—93
Alarm Relay—27, 29, 106, 103 Device Settings—79-92
Ammonia—155, 190 DHCP—135
Analog I/O—17, 32, 52, 57, 95, 109-111 Digital Input—30, 41, 56, 60, 102-104, 106, 158, 165,
API—10, 46, 111, 127, 155-157, 190-195, 197 184
Arm Address(es)—25, 28-29, 132 Digital Output—29, 99, 103, 105, 107, 130
Aromatic(s)—155, 190, 192, 194 DNS Server IP—137-138
Asphalt—10, 190 Downstream Solenoid—58, 105-106, 118, 173
Atmospheric Pressure—128 Driver ID—10, 21
Audit Trail—10, 40-41, 52, 56-58, 61, 68, 73 Dual Pulse—52, 58-59, 105, 120, 125, 149-150, 157,
Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)—40 176
Dynamic Display—43-66, 112, 114-115
Automatic Flow Optimization (AFO)—196
Auto Preset—120-124
Auto Prove—120, 124 E
Auto Proving—124-125 E+H—141
Email—129-131, 137-138
Engineering Diagnostics—60
B EPA—155, 190
Batch Start—30, 117, 160, 162, 165, 168, 170 Erase Event Log—71-73
Bay Directories—39, 95, 159-160 Erase Transaction Log—71, 73, 116
Bay Permissive—159-160 Ethanol—155, 190-194
Bays—32-33, 103, 123, 160-161 Ethernet Host Control—136
Bay Transaction(s)—112, 117 Ethernet Timeout—136
Bio Blend—155, 190 Event Log—40, 52-55, 67, 69, 71-73
Biodiesel—190, 193
Block Valve—12, 16, 97, 103-107, 129, 168, 185-186
Bluetooth—138
Board Address(es)—35, 86, 202
Board Set Function—26, 96, 98, 135-136, 211
Board Set Number—96, 98, 211
Boolean Algebraic—52, 59
Brazil—155, 190
C
Calibration—61, 71-78, 87-88, 90-92, 109-110, 178-182
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 211

F N
Factory Default—41-42, 117-119, 121-123, 126, 134, NEMA 4—8-9
139, 141-143, 152-153, 171, 177, 188 Netmask—79, 87-88, 135
Firmware—25, 52, 58, 61-63, 71, 78, 90, 93, 112-113, Net Proving—124
117-118, 134, 205 Network Diagnostics—60
Flash—205-206 NGL—155, 190
Flash Memory Error—206 Non-Resettable Volumes—52-54
Flow Control—11-12, 17, 33-34, 39, 41, 45, 51, 59, 95,
97, 106, 109, 112, 118-119, 133, 142, 149, 153-157, 162, O
164-168, 173-175, 183-186, 195, 200 Overrun Alarm—129, 164, 166, 174
Flow Controlled Additive—45, 51, 149, 157, 168
Flow Rate Time—112, 114, 196
Flow Tolerance—153, 157, 174-175, 184-185
P
Passcodes—31, 41
Permissive—9, 27, 30, 59, 103, 112, 117, 148, 159-160,
G 162
Gateway—79, 83, 87-88, 136 PID—154-155, 157, 173-174
Gross Proving—124 PIN—21-22, 144
Piston Injector—104-105, 148
H Piston Stop Action—145
High Flow Rate—12, 163-165, 184-185 Pressure Directory—39, 128, 173, 183, 195
HMI—26, 28-29, 79, 88, 98, 135, 138, 201 Printer Alarm—129, 133, 142
Host Interface—41, 80, 85, 132, 134-138, 141 Printer Control—132-133
Hybrid Blending—14-15, 71, 96, 175, 199 Printer Tray—103, 123
Print Report—67
I Product Blend—67, 198-200
Injector Rates—44-45, 50 Product Description—7
I/O Assignments—12, 17, 109 Product Directories—39, 95, 162, 183, 198
IP Address—80-89, 135-138, 202 Program Mode—19, 26-27, 31-32, 35-36, 38-41, 52,
55-56, 80, 85-87, 95-204
Promass—129, 141, 177
L Prompts—20, 132, 140, 143-144
Leakage Alarm Limit—117-118
Prove Log—67, 70
Leaking Solenoid—205
Proving—15, 41, 70, 71, 73-77, 124-125
Load Arm—11-12, 16, 32, 39, 43-48, 50, 53, 61, 78,
Proximity Card Reader—10
95-97, 99, 101, 104-105, 107, 109, 118, 132, 162-163,
Pulse Inputs—10, 17, 32, 52, 57, 59, 95-96, 98-99, 103,
165-166, 168-170. 172, 198-200
149, 157
Low Flow Rate—163, 185
Pulse Input Type—120, 149
LPG—10, 155, 190
Pulse Outputs—17, 32, 52, 58, 95, 100-101
Lube Oils—155, 190
M R
MAC Address—112-113
RAM—205-206
Main Menu—19, 31, 35, 43, 52, 67, 71, 76, 81, 87, 89-90
Ratio Blend—13-14, 95, 165, 167, 170, 173-174,
Maintenance Technicians—41
199-200
Mass Descriptor—26-27, 120
Ratio Blend Data—45, 49
Mass Units—120-121
Ratio Blending—10-11, 13-14, 71, 95-96, 101, 107, 109,
Maximum Available Arms—112-113
165, 167, 173-174, 199, 200
Maximum Preset—120-122
Ready Screen—19, 25, 29, 31, 44, 80, 85, 114, 143, 163
Meter Directories—39, 95, 162, 173
Recipe—7, 12-13, 18, 20, 23-24, 26, 32, 34, 39, 41,
Metered Injector—71, 76, 77 99, 103, 105, 106, 148,
44-45, 47, 50, 53-54, 103, 120, 123, 146-147, 165, 167,
151, 152, 200, 205, 207
169, 186, 198-200, 206
Meter Factor—18, 41, 46-48, 75-77, 124, 145, 152-153,
Recipe Additives—34, 95, 198, 200
187-188
Reference Density—46, 155-156, 190-192, 194, 197
Meter Pulse Inputs—10, 17, 52, 59, 96
Reference Temperature—46, 127, 188, 190-192, 194
Minicomp Host—141
Relative Density—46, 127, 156, 165, 191
Minimum Preset—120, 122, 186
Remote Browser—92, 112, 114-115
MMI Settings—79, 81, 87, 90
Report HM Class—159, 161
Modbus—10, 19, 28, 35, 113, 134, 136, 141-142, 210
Reports/Logs—67-70
Nedap Reader—132, 138-141
Page 212 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Reset Dual Pulse Errors—52, 58-59 U

Reset Totals—52, 58-59, 71, 78 UGC Densitometer—181, 182
Reverse Flow—118-119, 121, 125, 129 Unit ID—35-38. 112-113, 122
Reverse Volume—120-121 Units of Measure—11, 17
ROM—205-206 Unloading—10-11, 16, 19, 50, 96, 103, 168, 193
Run Display Options—27, 120 Update Driver Data—52, 61
Run Mode—19-20, 25, 29, 188 Update Firmware—52, 61
Run/Ready Mode—29, 90, 130-131 Update Leakage—120
Run Screen—20, 115 Update License—52, 61
Upstream Solenoid—106
S
Sarasota Densitometer—179-180 V
Screen Style—79 Valve—7, 9, 12-13, 15, 27, 29-30, 32, 47, 52, 59, 96-97,
Screen Test—79 103-107, 109-110, 129, 150, 153-155, 157, 164-168,
Security—11, 31, 33, 35, 40-42, 56, 58, 71, 91, 95, 171, 173-176, 183-186, 196
103-104, 112, 116, 124-125, 129, 134, 142, 144, 150, Valve Closure Data—52, 59
158-159, 175-176, 187-188 Valve Solenoid—106
Sening Cross Over Prevention (COP)—129, 138, 141 Vapor Line Valve—106
Sequential Blending—10-14, 49, 95-96, 103-104, 106, Vapor Recovery Line—106, 110
168, 198-200 Volume Accuracy—33-34, 39, 95, 112, 120-126, 162,
Serial Port—62, 132, 136, 141-143 169-171, 173, 175-176, 183, 186-188
Set Transaction Number—72 Volume Descriptor—26-27, 120, 122
Shared Printer—129, 141-142 Volumetric Coefficient of Expansion—74
Side-Stream Blending—10-11, 15, 96, 110, 167, 199 VRS—16, 48-49, 96, 106
Smart Injector—106, 147, 151-152, 200
Smith Meter—2, 7, 13, 138, 141, 152 W
SMTP—137-138 Weights and Measures—31, 40-41, 56, 61, 71-78, 125,
Solartron Densitometer—178-179, 182 142, 156, 158
Solenoid Actuation—52, 58, 118
W&M—76, 125
Solenoid Alarm—118
Solenoid, Downstream—58, 105-106, 118, 173
Solenoid, Leaking—205
Solenoid, Upstream—106
Solenoid, Valve—106
Split Architecture (SA)—9, 26, 28-29, 32, 34, 86, 95, 98,
117, 135, 201-203
Start Button Disable—112
Start Next Run—76
Start Pressed—30, 117, 160, 162
Stop Button Disable—112, 116
Storage Full Alarm—129
Summary Reports—67, 172
System Directories—39, 95, 112
System Layout—32, 95-98
T
Temperature/Density—33, 39, 95, 112, 127, 173,
177-182, 189-194
Temperature Units—127, 156-157, 188-190, 194
Ticket Alarm—129
Time Format—112-113
Transaction Log—7, 52, 55, 67-69, 71, 73, 116, 136
Transaction Start—54, 69, 117, 120, 124, 126, 143, 160,
162
Transmitter Integrity—17, 105, 120, 125, 129
Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 213

Technical Support
Field Service Response Center
24/7 Technical Support/Schedule
a Technician: 1-844-798-3819
System Installation Supervision,
Start-Up, Commissioning Services,
and Training Available
Revisions included in MN06200 Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21):

Complete revision.
The specifications contained herein are subject to change without notice and any user of said specifications should verify from the manufacturer that the specifications are currently in
effect. O
therwise, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for the use of specifications which may have been changed and are no longer in effect.
USA Operation
1602 Wagner Avenue
Erie, Pennsylvania 16510 USA
P:+1 814.898.5000
TechnipFMC Germany Operation

13460 Lockwood Road Smith Meter GmbH
TechnipFMC.com Building S01 Regentstrasse 1
Houston, Texas 77044 USA 25474 Ellerbek, Germany
© 2021 TechnipFMC plc. All rights reserved. MN06200 Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21) P:+1 281.591.4000 P:+49 4101 304.0

FMC Accuload 4 Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FMC Accuload 4 Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FMC Accuload 4 Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual

Electronic Preset Delivery System

Smith Meter is a registered trademark of TechnipFMC.

Page 2 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

4 Reports/Logs......................................................................... 67 8.2.7.1 Arm 1 - 6 Addresses................................................................ 132

Page 4 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figures Figure 48: System—General Purpose...................................... 36

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 5

Page 6 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

1.1 Product Description

1.2 AccuLoad IV Models and Module

1.2.1 AccuLoad IV ST Models

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 7

1.2.2 AccuLoad IV QT Model

Figure 2: AccuLoad IV QT Model

1.2.3 AccuLoad IV N4 Model

Page 8 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 3: AccuLoad IV N4 Model and MMI Module

1.2.4 AccuLoad IV SA Model

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 9

Figure 4: AccuLoad IV SA Model

1.3 Common Features of All Models

Page 10 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

• Built-in driver prompting

1.4 Configuring for Operation

1.4.1 Load Arm Types

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 11

Figure 5: Typical Straight Arm

1.4.1.2 Sequential Blending

Page 12 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 6: Sequential Blending Arm

1.4.1.3 Ratio Blending

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 13

Figure 7: Ratio Blending Arm

1.4.1.4 Hybrid Blending

Page 14 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 8: Hybrid Blending Arm

1.4.1.5 Side-Stream Blending

Figure 9: Side-Stream Blending Arm

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 15

Figure 10: Unloading Arm

Figure 11: Straight Arm With Vapor Recovery System (VRS)

Page 16 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

1.5 I/O Assignments

1.6 Units of Measure

1.7 Flow Control

Figure 12: Flow Rate Profile

600 Low Flow

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 17

1.8 Product Definition

1.9 Additive Injection

Page 18 • MN06200 ║ Issue/Rev. 0.2 (9/21)

Figure 13: Main Menu Screen

2.1 Run Mode Overview

Issue/Rev. 0.2 (4/21) ║ MN06200 • Page 19

2.1.1 Run Mode Options

1. Enter the responses to any prompts.

Figure 15: Run Screen with Transactions in Progress (Two-Arm Configuration)

2.1.2 Typical Loading Sequence